e497


SCHWAB RETIREMENT		PROSPECTUS MAY 1, 2012
INCOME VARIABLE ANNUITY^tm

Schwab Retirement Income Variable Annuity is an individual flexible premium deferred variable annuity contract issued by Pacific Life Insurance Company (Pacific Life) through Separate Account A of Pacific Life.

The Contracts are sold exclusively by financial consultants including independent contractors and their employees of Charles Schwab & Co., Inc. (“Schwab”) (“Schwab Financial Consultants”). In this Prospectus, you and your mean the Contract Owner or Policyholder. We, us and our refer to Pacific Life. Contract means a Schwab Retirement Income Variable Annuity contract, unless we state otherwise. Schwab is not affiliated with Pacific Life.

This Prospectus provides information you should know before buying a Contract. Please read the Prospectus carefully, and keep it for future reference.

Here’s a list of all the Investment Options currently available under your Contract; the Variable Investment Options are listed according to the underlying Funds:

VARIABLE INVESTMENT OPTIONS

Schwab VIT Portfolios

Schwab VIT Balanced Portfolio

Schwab VIT Balanced with Growth Portfolio

Schwab VIT Growth Portfolio

Pacific Select Fund


Cash Management*


*		The Cash Management Portfolio is only available to California applicants Age 60 or older during the Right to Cancel “Free Look” period.

You will find more information about the Contract and Separate Account A in the Statement of Additional Information (SAI) dated May 1, 2012. The SAI has been filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) and is considered to be part of this Prospectus because it’s incorporated by reference. You will find a table of contents for the SAI on page 50 of this Prospectus. You can get a copy of the SAI without charge by calling or writing to Pacific Life or you can visit our website at www.pacificlife.com. You can also visit the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov, which contains the SAI, material incorporated into this Prospectus by reference, and other information about registrants that file electronically with the SEC.

This Contract is not available in all states. This Prospectus is not an offer in any state or jurisdiction where we are not legally permitted to offer the Contract.

The Contract is described in detail in this Prospectus and its SAI. A Fund is described in its Prospectus and its SAI. No one has the right to describe the Contract or a Fund any differently than they have been described in these documents.

You should be aware that the SEC has not approved or disapproved of the securities or passed upon the accuracy or adequacy of the disclosure in this Prospectus. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.

This material is not intended to be used, nor can it be used by any taxpayer, for the purpose of avoiding U.S. federal, state or local tax penalties. Pacific Life, its distributors and their respective representatives do not provide tax, accounting or legal advice. Any taxpayer should seek advice based on the taxpayer’s particular circumstances from an independent tax advisor.

This Contract is not a deposit or obligation of, or guaranteed or endorsed by, any bank. It’s not federally insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC), the Federal Reserve Board, or any other government agency. Investment in a Contract involves risk, including possible loss of principal.

TERMS USED IN THIS PROSPECTUS

Some of the terms we’ve used in this Prospectus may be new to you. We’ve identified them in the Prospectus by capitalizing the first letter of each word. You will find an explanation of what they mean below.

If you have any questions, please ask your Schwab Financial Consultant if you are working with one, or call a Schwab Annuity Specialist at (888) 311-4887. You can reach Pacific Life directly at (800) 722-4448 or, if you are a Schwab Financial Consultant, please call Pacific Life at (800) 610-4823.

Account Value – The amount of your Contract Value allocated to a specified Variable Investment Option.

Annuitant – A person on whose life annuity payments may be determined. An Annuitant’s life may also be used to determine certain increases in death benefits, and to determine the Annuity Date. A Contract may name a single (“sole”) Annuitant or two (“Joint”) Annuitants, and may also name a “Contingent” Annuitant. If you name Joint Annuitants or a Contingent Annuitant, “the Annuitant” means the sole surviving Annuitant, unless otherwise stated.

Annuity Date – The date specified in your Contract, or the date you later elect, if any, for the start of annuity payments if the Annuitant (or Joint Annuitants) is (or are) still living and your Contract is in force; or if earlier, the date that annuity payments actually begin.

Annuity Option – Any one of the income options available for a series of payments after your Annuity Date.

Beneficiary – A person who may have a right to receive the death benefit payable upon the death of the Annuitant or a Contract Owner prior to the Annuity Date, or may have a right to receive remaining guaranteed annuity payments, if any, if the Annuitant dies after the Annuity Date.

Business Day – Any day on which the value of an amount invested in a Variable Investment Option is required to be determined, which currently includes each day that the New York Stock Exchange is open for trading and our administrative offices are open. The New York Stock Exchange and our administrative offices are closed on weekends and on the following holidays: New Year’s Day, Martin Luther King Jr. Day, President’s Day, Good Friday, Memorial Day, July Fourth, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day, and the Friday before New Year’s Day, July Fourth or Christmas Day if that holiday falls on a Saturday, the Monday following New Year’s Day, July Fourth or Christmas Day if that holiday falls on a Sunday, unless unusual business conditions exist, such as the ending of a monthly or yearly accounting period. In this Prospectus, “day” or “date” means Business Day unless otherwise specified. If any transaction or event called for under a Contract is scheduled to occur on a day that is not a Business Day, such transaction or event will be deemed to occur on the next following Business Day unless otherwise specified. Any systematic pre-authorized transaction scheduled to occur on December 30 or December 31 where that day is not a Business Day will be deemed an order for the last Business Day of the calendar year and will be calculated using the applicable Subaccount Unit Value at the close of that Business Day. Special circumstances such as leap years and months with fewer than 31 days are discussed in the SAI.

Code – The Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

Contingent Annuitant – A person, if named in your Contract, who will become your sole surviving Annuitant if your existing sole Annuitant (or both Joint Annuitants) should die before your Annuity Date.

Contract Anniversary – The same date, in each subsequent year, as your Contract Date.

Contract Date – The date we issue your Contract. Contract Years, Contract Semi-Annual Periods, Contract Quarters and Contract Months are measured from this date.

Contract Owner, Owner, Policyholder, you, or your – Generally, a person who purchases a Contract and makes the Investments. A Contract Owner has all rights in the Contract, including the right to make withdrawals, designate and change beneficiaries, transfer amounts among Investment Options, and designate an Annuity Option. If your Contract names Joint Owners, both Joint Owners are Contract Owners and share all such rights.

Contract Value – As of the end of any Business Day, the sum of your Variable Account Value.

Contract Year – A year that starts on the Contract Date or on a Contract Anniversary.

Earnings – As of the end of any Business Day, your Earnings equal your Contract Value less your aggregate Purchase Payments, which are reduced by withdrawals of prior Investments.

Fund – A registered open-end management investment company; collectively refers to Pacific Select Fund and Schwab VIT Portfolios.

General Account – Our General Account consists of all of our assets other than those assets allocated to Separate Account A or to any of our other separate accounts.

In Proper Form – This is the standard we apply when we determine whether an instruction is satisfactory to us. An instruction (in writing or by other means that we accept (e.g. via telephone or electronic submission)) is considered to be in proper form if it is received at our Service Center in a manner that is satisfactory to us, such that is sufficiently complete and clear so that we do not have to exercise any discretion to follow the instruction, including any information and supporting legal documentation necessary to effect the transaction. Any forms that we provide will identify any necessary supporting documentation. We may, in our sole discretion, determine whether any particular transaction request is in proper form, and we reserve the right to change or waive any in proper form requirements at any time.

Investment (“Purchase Payment”) – An amount paid to us by or on behalf of a Contract Owner as consideration for the benefits provided under the Contract.

Investment Option – A Subaccount or any other Investment Option added to the Contract by Rider or Endorsement.

Joint Annuitant – If your Contract is a Non-Qualified Contract, you may name two Annuitants, called “Joint Annuitants,” in your application for your Contract. Special restrictions apply for Qualified Contracts.

Non-Natural Owner – A corporation, trust or other entity that is not a (natural) person.

Non-Qualified Contract – A Contract other than a Qualified Contract.

Policyholder – The Contract Owner.

Portfolio – A separate portfolio of a Fund in which a Subaccount invests its assets.

Primary Annuitant – The individual that is named in your Contract, the events in the life of whom are of primary importance in affecting the timing or amount of the payout under the Contract.

Purchase Payment (“Investment”) – An amount paid to us by or on behalf of a Contract Owner as consideration for the benefits provided under the Contract.

Qualified Contract – A Contract that qualifies under the Code as an individual retirement annuity or account (IRA), or form thereof, or a Contract purchased by a Qualified Plan, qualifying for special tax treatment under the Code.

Qualified Plan – A retirement plan that receives favorable tax treatment under Section 401, 408, 408A or 457 of the Code.

SEC – Securities and Exchange Commission.

Separate Account A (the “Separate Account”) – A separate account of ours registered as a unit investment trust under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended (the “1940 Act”).

Subaccount – An investment division of the Separate Account. Each Subaccount invests its assets in shares of a corresponding Portfolio.

Subaccount Unit – Before your Annuity Date, each time you allocate an amount to a Subaccount, your Contract is credited with a number of Subaccount Units in that Subaccount. These Units are used for accounting purposes to measure your Account Value in that Subaccount. The value of Subaccount Units is expected to fluctuate daily, as described in the definition of Unit Value.

Unit Value – The value of a Subaccount Unit (“Subaccount Unit Value”). Unit Value of any Subaccount is subject to change on any Business Day in much the same way that the value of a mutual fund share changes each day. The fluctuations in value reflect the investment results, expenses of and charges against the Portfolio in which the Subaccount invests its assets. Fluctuations also reflect charges against the Separate Account. Unit Value of a Subaccount Unit on any Business Day is measured as of the close of the New York Stock Exchange on that Business Day, which usually closes at 4:00 p.m., Eastern time, although it occasionally closes earlier.

Variable Account Value – The aggregate amount of your Contract Value allocated to all Subaccounts.

Variable Investment Option – A Subaccount (also called a Variable Account).

AN OVERVIEW OF SCHWAB RETIREMENT INCOME VARIABLE ANNUITY

This overview tells you some key things you should know about your Contract. It’s designed as a summary only – please read this Prospectus, your Contract and the Statement of Additional Information (SAI) for more detailed information.

Certain Contract features described in this Prospectus may vary or may not be available in your state. The state in which your Contract is issued governs whether or not certain features, Riders, charges or fees are allowed or will vary under your Contract. These variations are reflected in your Contract and in Riders or Endorsements to your Contract. See your Schwab Financial Consultant or contact us for specific information that may be applicable to your state. See ADDITIONAL INFORMATION – State Considerations. This prospectus provides a description of the material rights and obligations under the Contract. Your Contract (including any riders and/or endorsements) represents the contractual agreement between you and us. Any guarantees provided for under your Contract or through optional riders are backed by Pacific Life’s financial strength and claims-paying ability. You must look to the strength of the insurance company with regard to such guarantees. Schwab is not responsible for any Contract guarantees.

Some of the Terms used in this Prospectus may be new to you. You will find a glossary of certain terms in the TERMS USED IN THIS PROSPECTUS section.

Schwab Retirement Income Variable Annuity Basics

An annuity contract may be appropriate if you are looking for retirement income or you want to meet other long-term financial objectives. Discuss with your Schwab Financial Consultant whether a variable annuity, optional benefits and which underlying Investment Options are appropriate for you, taking into consideration your age, income, net worth, tax status, insurance needs, financial objectives, investment goals, liquidity needs, time horizon, risk tolerance and other relevant information. Together you can decide if a variable annuity is right for you.

This Contract may not be the right one for you if you need to withdraw money for short-term needs, because tax penalties for early withdrawal may apply.

You should consider the Contract’s investment and income benefits, as well as its costs.

This Contract is an annuity contract between you and Pacific Life. Annuity contracts have two phases, the accumulation phase and the annuitization phase. The two phases are discussed below.

This Contract is designed for long-term financial planning. It allows you to invest money on a tax-deferred basis for retirement or other goals, and/or to receive income in a variety of ways, including a series of income payments for life or for a specified period of years.

Non-Qualified and Qualified Contracts are available. You buy a Qualified Contract under a qualified retirement or pension plan, or some form of an individual retirement annuity or account (IRA). It is important to know that IRAs and qualified plans are already tax-deferred which means the tax deferral feature of a variable annuity does not provide a benefit in addition to that already offered by an IRA or qualified plan. An annuity contract should only be used to fund an IRA or qualified plan to benefit from the annuity’s features other than tax deferral.

This Contract is a variable annuity, which means that your Contract Value fluctuates depending on the performance of the Investment Options you choose. The Contract allows you to choose how often you make Investments (“Purchase Payments”) and how much you add each time, subject to certain limitations.

Your Right to Cancel (“Free Look”)

During the Free Look period, you have the right to cancel your Contract and return it with instructions to us or to your Schwab Financial Consultant for a refund. The amount refunded may be more or less than the Purchase Payments you have made and the length of the Free Look period may vary, depending on the state where you signed your application and the type of Contract you purchased.

For more information about the Right to Cancel (“Free Look”) period see WITHDRAWALS – Right to Cancel (“Free Look”).

AN OVERVIEW OF SCHWAB RETIREMENT INCOME VARIABLE ANNUITY

The Accumulation Phase

The Investment Options you choose and how they perform will affect your Contract Value during the accumulation phase, as well as the amount available to annuitize on the Annuity Date.

The accumulation phase begins on your Contract Date and continues until your Annuity Date. During the accumulation phase, you can put money in your Contract by making Purchase Payments subject to certain limitations, and choose Investment Options in which to allocate them. You can also take money out of your Contract by making a withdrawal.

Investments (“Purchase Payments”)

Your initial Purchase Payment must be at least $50,000 for a Non-Qualified Contract or a Qualified Contract. Additional Purchase Payments must be at least $250 for a Non-Qualified Contract and $50 for a Qualified Contract. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum additional Purchase Payment amounts on Qualified and Non-Qualified Contracts, but we reserve the right to enforce such minimums in the future.

For more information about Making Your Investments (“Purchase Payments”) see PURCHASING YOUR CONTRACT – Making Your Investments (“Purchase Payments”).

Investment Options

Ask your Schwab Financial Consultant to help you choose the right Investment Options for your goals and risk tolerance. Schwab or the Schwab Financial Consultant you engage to provide advice and/or make transfers for you is not acting on our behalf. Pacific Life is not responsible for any investment decisions or allocations you make, recommendations such Schwab Financial Consultants make or any allocations or specific transfers they choose to make on your behalf.

You can choose from a selection of Variable Investment Options (also called Subaccounts), each of which invests in a corresponding Fund Portfolio. The value of each Portfolio will fluctuate with the value of the investments it holds, and returns are not guaranteed.

We allocate your Purchase Payments to the Investment Options you choose. Your Contract Value will fluctuate during the accumulation phase depending on the Investment Options you have chosen. You bear the investment risk of any Variable Investment Options you choose.

For more information about the Investment Options and the Investment Advisers see YOUR INVESTMENT OPTIONS – Your Variable Investment Options.

Transferring Among Investment Options

Transfers are allowed 30 days after the Contract Date. Currently, we are not enforcing this restriction but we reserve the right to enforce it in the future. Once your Purchase Payments are allocated to the Investment Options you selected, you may transfer your Account Value from any Investment Option to any other Investment Option. Transfers are limited to 25 for each calendar year. Transfers made under any systematic transfer program are excluded from these limitations.

For more information about transfers and transfer limitations see HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED – Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions.

Withdrawals

You can make full and partial withdrawals to supplement your income or for other purposes. There is no withdrawal charge.

In general, you may have to pay income taxes on withdrawals or other distributions from your Contract. If you are under age 591/2, a 10% federal tax penalty may also apply to taxable withdrawals.

For more information about withdrawals and withdrawal minimums see WITHDRAWALS – Optional Withdrawals.

The Annuitization Phase

The annuitization phase of your Contract begins on your Annuity Date. Generally, you can choose to surrender your Contract and receive a single payment or you can annuitize your Contract and receive a series of income payments over a fixed period or for life.

These annuity payments will be fixed. You can choose monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual payments. We will make the income payments to you or your designated payee. The Owner is responsible for any tax consequences of any annuity payments.

For more information about annuitization see ANNUITIZATION and annuity options available under the Contract see ANNUITIZATION – Choosing Your Annuity Option – Annuity Options.

The Death Benefit

Generally, the Contract provides a death payout upon the first death of an Owner or the death of the sole surviving Annuitant, whichever occurs first, during the accumulation phase. Death benefit proceeds are payable when we receive proof of death and payment instructions In Proper Form. To whom we pay a death benefit depends on who dies first and the type of Contract you own.

For more information about the death benefit see DEATH BENEFITS.

Optional Riders

Optional Riders are subject to availability (including state availability). Before purchasing any optional Rider, make sure you understand all of the terms and conditions and consult with your Schwab Financial Consultant for advice on whether an optional Rider is appropriate for you. Any guarantees provided through optional riders are backed by Pacific Life’s financial strength and claims-paying ability. You must look to the strength of the insurance company with regard to such guarantees. Schwab is not responsible for any optional Rider guarantees.

Optional Living Benefit Riders

You may purchase an optional Rider at anytime (if available). Your election to purchase an optional Rider must be received In Proper Form.

At initial purchase and during the entire time that you own an optional living benefit Rider, you must invest your entire Contract Value in an asset allocation program or in Investment Options we make available for these Riders. The allocation limitations associated with these Riders may limit the number of Investment Options that are otherwise available to you under your Contract. See OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT RIDERS – General Information – Investment Allocation Requirements. Failure to adhere to the Investment Allocation Requirements may cause your Rider to terminate. We reserve the right to add, remove or change asset allocation programs or Investment Options we make available for these Riders at any time. We may make such a change due to a fund reorganization, fund substitution, or when we believe a change is necessary to protect our ability to provide the guarantees under these Riders.

Distributions made due to divorce instructions or under Code Section 72(t)/72(q) (substantially equal periodic payments) are treated as withdrawals for Contract purposes and may adversely affect Rider benefits.

Taking a withdrawal before a certain age or a withdrawal that is greater than the annual withdrawal amount (“excess withdrawal”) under a particular Rider may result in adverse consequences such as a permanent reduction in Rider benefits or the failure to receive lifetime withdrawals under a Rider.

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Single)

This optional Rider lets you, before the Annuity Date, withdraw up to 5% of your Protected Payment Base per year (once age 591/2 is reached), lock in market gains, and provides the potential to withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount, until the Rider terminates, if certain conditions are met. If your total withdrawals in a Contract Year exceed the annual withdrawal amount allowed under the Rider, then the Protected Payment Base may decrease and the amount you may withdraw in the future under the Rider may be reduced.

On each Contract Anniversary, the Rider provides for Automatic Resets of the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value if the Protected Payment Base is less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. Any reset may include a change in the annual charge percentage (up to a maximum of 1.50%) associated with the Rider. Protected Payment Base, Protected Payment Amount, Automatic Reset, and Reset Date are described in OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT RIDERS – Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Single).

This Rider is called the Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit IX Rider – Single Life in the Rider attached to your Contract.

For more information about Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Single) see OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT RIDERS – Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Single).

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Joint)

Fees and Expenses

This section of the overview explains the fees and expenses that you will pay when buying, owning and surrendering your Schwab Retirement Income Variable Annuity Contract.

Contract Transaction Expenses

There are no front-end sales charges or withdrawal charges. Premium taxes and/or other taxes may apply to your Contract. We generally charge state premium taxes and/or other taxes when you annuitize your Contract, but there are other times when we charge them to your Contract instead. Please see your Contract for details.

Periodic Expenses

The following describes the fees and expenses that you will pay periodically during the time you own your Contract not including Portfolio fees and expenses.

Separate Account A Annual Expenses (as a percentage of the average daily Variable Account Value¹):


• Mortality and Expense Risk Charge²			0.35%
• Administrative Fee²			0.25%

• Total Separate Account A Annual Expenses			0.60%

Optional Rider³ Annual Expenses:


	Current Charge		Maximum Charge
	Percentage		Percentage

• Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Single)⁴		0.80%		1.50%
• Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Joint)⁴		1.00%		1.75%


¹		The Variable Account Value is the value of your Variable Investment Options on any Business Day.

²		This is an annual rate and is assessed on a daily basis. The daily rate is calculated by dividing the annual rate by 365.

³		Only one withdrawal benefit rider (Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Single) or (Joint)) may be owned or in effect at the same time.

⁴		If you buy Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Single) or (Joint), the annual charge is deducted from your Contract Value on a quarterly basis. The quarterly charge is the current charge percentage (divided by 4) multiplied by the Protected Payment Base. On the Rider Effective Date, the Protected Payment Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment if purchased at Contract issue or, if purchased after Contract issue, the Contract Value as of the Rider Effective Date. For a complete explanation of the Protected Payment Base, see the OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT RIDERS – Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Single) or (Joint). The quarterly amount deducted may increase or decrease due to changes in your Protected Payment Base. Your Protected Payment Base may increase due to additional Purchase Payments, decrease due to withdrawals or also change due to Resets. After the Rider Effective Date, we deduct the charge proportionately from your Investment Options every 3 month anniversary of your Contract Date, during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect, and when the Rider is terminated. Under the Single version, we will waive the annual charge if the Rider terminates as a result of the death of an Owner or sole surviving Annuitant, upon full annuitization of your Contract, or if your Contract Value is zero. Under the Joint version, we will waive the annual charge if the Rider terminates as a result of the death of the surviving Designated Life, upon full annuitization of your Contract, or if your Contract Value is zero. Upon annuitization, the annual charge is only waived for the quarter that annuitization occurs. If the Rider terminates as a result of death, any annual charge deducted between the date of death and the Notice Date will be prorated as applicable to the date of death and added to the Contract Value on the Notice Date. See CHARGES, FEES, AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges.

AN OVERVIEW OF SCHWAB RETIREMENT INCOME VARIABLE ANNUITY

Total Annual Fund Operating Expenses

For more about the underlying Funds see YOUR INVESTMENT OPTIONS – Your Variable Investment Options, and see each underlying Fund Prospectus.

This table shows the minimum and maximum total annual operating expenses incurred by the Portfolios that you indirectly pay during the time you own the Contract. This table shows the range (minimum and maximum) of fees and expenses (including management fees, shareholder servicing and/or distribution (12b-1) fees, and other expenses) charged by any of the Portfolios, expressed as an annual percentage of average daily net assets. The Portfolios under this Contract are new and the percentages expressed below are based on estimates for the current fiscal year.

Each Variable Account of the Separate Account purchases shares of the corresponding Fund Portfolio at net asset value. The net asset value reflects the investment advisory fees and other expenses that are deducted from the assets of the Portfolio. The advisory fees and other expenses are not fixed or specified under the terms of the Contract, and they may vary from year to year. These fees and expenses are described in each Fund Prospectus.


	Minimum		Maximum

Range of total annual portfolio operating expenses before any waivers or expense reimbursements		1.00%		1.00%
Range of total annual portfolio operating expenses after any waivers or expense reimbursements		0.80%		0.80%

To help limit Fund expenses, Charles Schwab Investment Management, Inc. contractually agreed to reduce investment advisory fees or otherwise reimburse certain Portfolios of their respective Funds which may reduce the Portfolio’s expenses. The range of expenses in the first row above does not include the effect of any waiver and/or expense reimbursement arrangement. The range of expenses in the second row above includes the effect of Fund waiver and/or expense reimbursement arrangements that are in effect. The waiver and/or reimbursement arrangements vary in length. There can be no assurance that Fund expense waivers or reimbursements will be extended beyond their current terms as outlined in each Fund prospectus, and they may not cover certain expenses such as extraordinary expenses. See each Fund prospectus for complete information regarding annual operating expenses and any waivers or reimbursements in effect for a particular Fund.

Examples

The following examples are intended to help you compare the cost of investing in your Contract with the cost of investing in other variable annuity contracts. The maximum amounts reflected below include the maximum periodic Contract expenses, Contract Transaction Expenses, Separate Account annual expenses and the Portfolio with the highest estimated fees and expenses. The maximum amounts also include the combination of optional Riders whose cumulative maximum charge expenses totaled more than any other optional Rider combination. The optional Rider included is Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Joint). The minimum amounts reflected below include the minimum periodic Contract expenses, Separate Account annual expenses and the Portfolio with the lowest estimated fees and expenses. The minimum amounts do not include any optional Riders.

The examples assume that you invest $10,000 in the Contract for the time periods indicated. They also assume that your Purchase Payment has a 5% return each year and assumes the estimated maximum and minimum fees and expenses of all of the Investment Options available. Although your actual costs may be higher or lower, based on these assumptions, your maximum and minimum costs would be:


•	If you surrendered, annuitized, or left your money in your Contract:


	1 Year	3 Years	5 Years	10 Years
Maximum*	$338	$1,021	$1,716	$3,510
Minimum*	$163	$505	$871	$1,900


*		In calculating the examples above, we used the maximum and minimum total operating expenses of all the Portfolios as shown in the Fees And Expenses section of each Fund Prospectus. For more information on Contract fees and expenses, see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS in this Prospectus, and see each Fund Prospectus.

YOUR INVESTMENT OPTIONS

Work with your Schwab Financial Consultant to help you choose the right Investment Options for your investment goals and risk tolerance.

You may choose among the different Variable Investment Options.

Your Variable Investment Options

Each Variable Investment Option invests in a separate Fund Portfolio. For your convenience, the following chart summarizes some basic data about each Portfolio. This chart is only a summary. For more complete information on each Portfolio, including a discussion of the Portfolio’s investment techniques and the risks associated with its investments, see the applicable Fund Prospectus. No assurance can be given that a Portfolio will achieve its investment objective. YOU SHOULD READ EACH FUND PROSPECTUS CAREFULLY BEFORE INVESTING.



SCHWAB VIT PORTFOLIOS	INVESTMENT GOAL	MANAGER

Schwab VIT Balanced Portfolio	Seeks long-term capital appreciation and income.	Charles Schwab Investment Management, Inc.

Schwab VIT Balanced with Growth Portfolio	Seeks long-term capital appreciation and income.	Charles Schwab Investment Management, Inc.

Schwab VIT Growth Portfolio	Seeks long-term capital appreciation.	Charles Schwab Investment Management, Inc.



PACIFIC SELECT FUND	INVESTMENT GOAL	MANAGER

Cash Management*	Seeks current income consistent with preservation of capital.	Pacific Asset Management


*		The Cash Management Portfolio is only available to California applicants Age 60 or older during the Right to Cancel “Free Look” period.

The Investment Advisers

Charles Schwab Investment Management, Inc. (“CSIM”) is the investment adviser for the Schwab VIT Portfolios. CSIM is a subsidiary of the Charles Schwab Corporation and an affiliate of Schwab. CSIM manages the Schwab Funds^®, Laudus Funds, and the Schwab ETFs including certain ETFs in which the Schwab VIT Portfolios will invest.

Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC (PLFA), a subsidiary of Pacific Life Insurance Company, is the investment adviser for the Pacific Select Fund. PLFA and the Pacific Select Fund’s Board of Trustees oversee the management of all the Pacific Select Fund’s Portfolios, and PLFA also manages certain portfolios directly. PLFA also does business under the name “Pacific Asset Management” and manages the Pacific Select Fund’s Cash Management Portfolio under that name.

PURCHASING YOUR CONTRACT

How to Apply for Your Contract

To purchase a Contract, you must work with your Schwab Financial Consultant to fill out an application and submit it along with your initial Purchase Payment to Pacific Life Insurance Company at P.O. Box 2290, Omaha, Nebraska 68103-2290. In those instances when we receive electronic transmission of the information on the application from Schwab and our administrative procedures with Schwab so provide, we consider the application to be received on the Business Day we receive the transmission. If your application and Purchase Payment are complete when received, or once they have become complete, we will issue your Contract within 2 Business Days. If some information is missing from your application, we may delay issuing your Contract while we obtain the missing information. However, we will not hold your initial Purchase Payment for more than 5 Business Days without your permission. In any case, we will not hold your initial Purchase Payment after 20 Business Days.

You may also purchase a Contract by exchanging your existing annuity. Call your Schwab Financial Consultant if you are working with one, or call a Schwab Annuity Specialist at (888) 311-4887. You can reach Pacific Life directly at (800) 722-4448 or, if you are a Schwab Financial Consultant, please call Pacific Life at (800) 610-4823.

We reserve the right to reject any application or Purchase Payment for any reason, subject to any applicable nondiscrimination laws and to our own standards and guidelines. On your application, you must provide us with a valid U.S. tax identification number for federal and state tax reporting purposes.

The maximum age of a Contract Owner/Annuitant, including Joint Owners/Annuitants and Contingent Annuitants, for which a Contract will be issued is 90. The Contract Owner’s age is calculated as of his or her last birthday. If any Contract Owner or any sole Annuitant named in the application for a Contract dies and we are notified of the death before we issue the Contract, then we will return the amount we received. If we are not notified of the death and we issue the Contract, then the application for the Contract and/or any Contract issued will be deemed cancelled and a refund will be issued. Depending on the state where your application was signed, the refund amount may be more or less than the initial Purchase Payment received, or any other Purchase Payment we received in connection with an exchange or transfer. In most states, the refund will be the Contract Value based upon the next determined Accumulated Unit Value (AUV) after we receive proof of death, In Proper Form, of the Contract Owner or Annuitant, plus a refund of any amount used to pay premium taxes and/or any other taxes. Any refund may subject the refunded assets to probate.

Making Your Investments (“Purchase Payments”)

Making Your Initial Purchase Payment

Your initial Purchase Payment must be at least $50,000 for Non-Qualified or Qualified Contracts. For Non-Qualified Contracts, if the entire minimum initial Purchase Payment is not included when you submit your application, you must submit a portion of the required Contract minimum and/or establish a pre-authorized checking plan (PAC). A PAC allows you to pay the remainder of the required initial Purchase Payment in equal installments over the first year. Further requirements for PAC are discussed in the PAC form.

You must obtain our consent before making an initial or additional Purchase Payment that will bring your aggregate Purchase Payments over $1,000,000.

Making Additional Purchase Payments

If your Contract is Non-Qualified, you may choose to invest additional amounts in your Contract at any time. If your Contract is Qualified, the method of contribution and contribution limits may be restricted by the Qualified Plan or the Internal Revenue Code (“the Code”). Each additional Purchase Payment must be at least $250 for Non-Qualified Contracts and $50 for Qualified Contracts. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum additional Purchase Payment amounts but we reserve the right to enforce the minimum additional Purchase Payment amounts in the future. Additional Purchase Payments will be allocated according to the instructions we have on file unless we receive specific allocation instructions. Contracts issued in certain states may limit additional Purchase Payments. If your Contract is in closed status (e.g. Purchase Payments are no longer accepted under the terms of your Contract, the Contract was

surrendered, a Free Look was exercised, or death of an Owner or Annuitant occurred, etc.) and we receive additional Purchase Payments that are equal to or less than $10.00 (“residual payments”), the residual payments will not be refunded to you. Instead, the funds will be donated to the Pacific Life Foundation. We reserve the right to adjust the designated threshold amount ($10.00) as deemed necessary. We will refund any residual payment that is greater than $10.00.

Forms of Purchase Payment

Your initial and additional Purchase Payments may be sent by personal or bank check or by wire transfer. Purchase Payments must be made in a form acceptable to us before we can process it. Acceptable forms of Purchase Payments are:


	•	personal checks or cashier’s checks drawn on a U.S. bank,

	•	money orders and traveler’s checks in single denominations of more than $10,000 if they originate in a U.S. bank,

	•	third party payments when there is a clear connection of the third party to the underlying transaction, and

	•	wire transfers that originate in U.S. banks.

We will not accept Purchase Payments in the following forms:


	•	cash,

	•	credit cards or checks drawn against a credit card account,

	•	money orders or traveler’s checks in single denominations of $10,000 or less,

	•	starter checks,

	•	home equity checks,

	•	cashier’s checks, money orders, traveler’s checks or personal checks drawn on non-U.S. banks, even if the payment may be effected through a U.S. bank,

	•	third party payments if there is not a clear connection of the third party to the underlying transaction, and

	•	wire transfers that originate from foreign bank accounts.

All unacceptable forms of Purchase Payments will be returned to the payor along with a letter of explanation. We reserve the right to reject or accept any form of payment. Any unacceptable Purchase Payment incidentally invested may be returned and the amount returned may be more or less than the amount submitted. If you make Purchase Payments by check other than a cashier’s check, your payment of any withdrawal proceeds and any refund during the “Right to Cancel” period may be delayed until we receive confirmation in our Annuities administrative office that your check has cleared.

HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED

Choosing Your Investment Options

You may allocate your Purchase Payments among any of the available Investment Options. Allocations of your initial Purchase Payment to the Investment Options you selected will be effective on your Contract Date. Each additional Purchase Payment will be allocated to the Investment Options according to your allocation instructions in your application, or most recent instructions, if any, subject to the terms described in WITHDRAWALS – Right to Cancel (“Free Look”). We reserve the right to require that your allocation to any particular Investment Option must be at least $500. We also reserve the right to transfer any remaining Account Value that is not at least $500 to your other Investment Options on a pro rata basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions.

If your Contract is issued in exchange for another annuity contract or a life insurance policy, our administrative procedures may vary depending on the state in which your Contract is delivered.

Investing in Variable Investment Options

Each time you allocate your Purchase Payment to a Variable Investment Option, your Contract is credited with a number of “Subaccount Units” in that Subaccount. The number of Subaccount Units credited is equal to the amount you have allocated to that Subaccount, divided by the “Unit Value” of one Unit of that Subaccount.

Example: You allocate $600 to Subaccount A. At the end of the Business Day on which your allocation is effective, the value of one Unit in Subaccount A is $15. As a result, 40 Subaccount Units are credited to your Contract for your $600 ($600 / $15 = 40).

Your Variable Account Value Will Change

After we credit your Contract with Subaccount Units, the value of those Units will usually fluctuate. This means that, from time to time, your Purchase Payments allocated to the Variable Investment Options may be worth more or less than the original Purchase Payments to which those amounts can be attributed. Fluctuations in Subaccount Unit Value will not change the number of Units credited to your Contract.

Subaccount Unit Values will vary in accordance with the investment performance of the corresponding Portfolio. For example, the value of Units in the Schwab VIT Growth Subaccount will change to reflect the performance of the Schwab VIT Growth Portfolio (including that Portfolio’s investment income, its capital gains and losses, and its expenses). Subaccount Unit Values are also adjusted to reflect the Administrative Fee and applicable Risk Charge imposed on the Separate Account.

We calculate the value of all Subaccount Units on each Business Day.

Calculating Subaccount Unit Values

We calculate the Unit Value of the Subaccount Units in each Variable Investment Option at the close of the New York Stock Exchange which usually closes at 4:00 p.m. Eastern Time on each Business Day. At the end of each Business Day, the Unit Value for a Subaccount is equal to:

Y × Z


where	(Y)	=	the Unit Value for that Subaccount as of the end of the preceding Business Day; and
	(Z)	=	the Net Investment Factor for that Subaccount for the period (a “valuation period”) between that Business Day and the immediately preceding Business Day.

The “Net Investment Factor” for a Subaccount for any valuation period is equal to:

(A ¸ B) − C


where		(A)		=		the “per share value of the assets” of that Subaccount as of the end of that valuation period, which is equal to: a + b + c


where	(a)	=	the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio shares held by that Subaccount as of the end of that valuation period;
	(b)	=	the per share amount of any dividend or capital gain distributions made by each Fund for that Portfolio during that valuation period; and
	(c)	=	any per share charge (a negative number) or credit (a positive number) for any income taxes and/or any other taxes or other amounts set aside during that valuation period as a reserve for any income and/or any other taxes which we determine to have resulted from the operations of the Subaccount or Contract, and/or any taxes attributable, directly or indirectly, to Purchase Payments;


(B)	=	the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio shares held by the Subaccount as of the end of the preceding valuation period; and
(C)	=	a factor that assesses against the Subaccount net assets for each calendar day in the valuation period the basic Risk Charge plus the Administrative Fee and any applicable increase in the Risk Charge (see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS).

The Subaccount Unit Value may increase or decrease from one valuation period to another.

When Your Purchase Payment is Effective

Your initial Purchase Payment is effective on the day we issue your Contract. Any additional Purchase Payment is effective on the day we receive it In Proper Form. See ADDITIONAL INFORMATION – Inquiries and Submitting Forms and Requests.

The day your Purchase Payment is effective determines the Unit Value at which Subaccount Units are attributed to your Contract. In the case of transfers or withdrawals, the effective day determines the Unit Value at which affected Subaccount Units are debited and/or credited under your Contract. That Unit Value is the value of the Subaccount Units next calculated after your transaction is effective. Your Variable Account Value begins to reflect the investment performance results of your new allocations on the day after your transaction is effective.

Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions

Transfers

Transfers to or from a Variable Investment Option cannot be made before the seventh calendar day following the last transfer to or from the same Variable Investment Option. If the seventh calendar day is not a Business Day, then a transfer may not occur until the next Business Day. The day of the last transfer is not considered a calendar day for purposes of meeting this requirement. For example, if you make a transfer into the Schwab VIT Growth Variable Investment Option on Monday, you may not make any transfers to or from that Variable Investment Option before the following Monday.

For the purpose of applying the limitations, multiple transfers that occur on the same day are considered 1 transfer. Transfers that occur as a result of the portfolio rebalancing program are excluded from these limitations. Also, allocations of Purchase Payments are not subject to these limitations.

If you have used all 25 transfers available to you in a calendar year, you may no longer make transfers between the Investment Options until the start of the next calendar year.

There are no exceptions to the above transfer limitations in the absence of an error by us, a substitution of Investment Options, or reorganization of underlying Portfolios, or other extraordinary circumstances.

If we deny a transfer request, we will notify your Schwab Financial Consultant via telephone. If you (or your Schwab Financial Consultant) request a transfer via telephone that exceeds the above limitations, we will notify you (or your Schwab Financial Consultant) immediately.

Transfer requests are generally effective on the Business Day we receive them In Proper Form, unless you request a systematic transfer program with a future date.

We have the right, at our option (unless otherwise required by law), to require certain minimums in the future in connection with transfers. These may include a minimum transfer amount and a minimum Account Value, if any, for the Investment Option from which the transfer is made or to which the transfer is made. If your transfer request results in your having a remaining Account Value in an Investment Option that is less than $500 immediately after such transfer, we may transfer that Account Value to your other Investment Options on a pro rata basis, relative to your most recent allocation instructions.

We reserve the right (unless otherwise required by law) to limit the size of transfers, to restrict transfers, to require that you submit any transfer requests in writing, to suspend transfers, and to impose further limits on the number and frequency of transfers you can make. We also reserve the right to reject any transfer request. Any policy we may establish with regard to the exercise of any of these rights will be applied uniformly to all Contract Owners.

Market-timing Restrictions

The Contract is not designed to serve as a vehicle for frequent trading in response to short-term fluctuations in the market. Accordingly, organizations or individuals that use market-timing investment strategies and make frequent transfers should not purchase the Contract. Such frequent trading can disrupt management of the underlying Portfolios and raise expenses. The transfer limitations set forth above are intended to reduce frequent trading. In addition, we monitor certain large transaction activity in an attempt to detect trading that may be disruptive to the Portfolios. In the event transfer activity is found to be disruptive, certain future transactions by such Contract Owners, or by a Schwab Financial Consultant or other party acting on behalf of one or more Contract Owners, will require preclearance. Frequent trading and large transactions that are disruptive to portfolio management can have an adverse effect on Portfolio performance and therefore your Contract’s performance. Such trading may also cause dilution in the value of the Investment Options held by long-term Contract Owners. While these issues can occur in connection with any of the underlying Portfolios, Portfolios holding securities that are subject to market pricing inefficiencies are more susceptible to abuse. For example, Portfolios holding international securities may be more susceptible to time-zone arbitrage which seeks to take advantage of pricing discrepancies occurring between the time of the closing of the market on which the security is traded and the time of pricing of the Portfolios.

Our policies and procedures which limit the number and frequency of transfers and which may impose preclearance requirements on certain large transactions are applied uniformly to all Contract Owners. However, there is a risk that these policies and procedures will not detect all potentially disruptive activity or will otherwise prove ineffective in whole or in part. Further, we and our affiliates make available to our variable annuity and variable life insurance Contract Owners underlying funds not affiliated with us. We are unable to monitor or restrict the trading activity with respect to shares of such funds not sold in connection with our Contracts. In the event the Board of Trustees/Directors of any underlying fund imposes a redemption fee or trading (transfer) limitations, we will pass them on to you.

We reserve the right to restrict, in our sole discretion and without prior notice, transfers initiated by a market timing organization or individual or other party authorized to give transfer instructions on behalf of multiple Contract Owners. Such restrictions could include:


	•	not accepting transfer instructions from a Schwab Financial Consultant acting on behalf of more than one Contract Owner, and

	•	not accepting preauthorized transfer forms from market timers or other entities acting on behalf of more than one Contract Owner at a time.

We further reserve the right to impose, without prior notice, restrictions on transfers that we determine, in our sole discretion, will disadvantage or potentially hurt the rights or interests of other Contract Owners; or to comply with any applicable federal and state laws, rules and regulations.

Systematic Transfer Option

We offer one systematic transfer option: portfolio rebalancing. There is no charge for this option and transfers under this option are not counted towards your total transfers in a calendar year. However, portfolio rebalancing is subject to the same requirements and restrictions as non-systematic transfers. Work with your Schwab Financial Consultant prior to electing portfolio rebalancing.

Portfolio Rebalancing

You may instruct us to maintain a specific balance of Variable Investment Options under your Contract (e.g. 30% in Subaccount A, 40% in Subaccount B, and 30% in Subaccount C). Periodically, we will “rebalance” your values in the elected Subaccounts to the percentages you have specified. Rebalancing may result in transferring amounts from a Subaccount earning a relatively higher return to one earning a relatively lower return. You may choose to have rebalances made quarterly, semi-annually or annually until your Annuity Date. Only Variable Investment Options are available for rebalancing. Detailed information appears in the SAI.

CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS

Mortality and Expense Risk Charge

We assess a charge against the assets of each Subaccount to compensate for certain mortality and expense risks that we assume under the Contract (the “Risk Charge”). The risk that an Annuitant will live longer (and therefore receive more annuity payments) than we predict through our actuarial calculations at the time the Contract is issued is “mortality risk.” The risk that the expense charges and fees under the Contract and Separate Account are less than our actual administrative and operating expenses is called “expense risk.”

This Risk Charge is assessed daily at an annual rate equal to 0.35% of each Subaccount’s assets.

The Risk Charge will stop at the Annuity Date.

We will realize a gain if the Risk Charge exceeds our actual cost of expenses and benefits, and will suffer a loss if such actual costs exceed the Risk Charge. Any gain will become part of our General Account. We may use it for any reason, including covering sales expenses on the Contracts.

Administrative Fee

We charge an Administrative Fee as compensation for costs we incur in operating the Separate Account, issuing and administering the Contracts, including processing applications and payments, and issuing reports to you and to regulatory authorities.

The Administrative Fee is assessed daily at an annual rate equal to 0.25% of the assets of each Subaccount. This rate is guaranteed not to increase for the life of your Contract. A correlation will not necessarily exist between the actual administrative expenses attributable to a particular Contract and the Administrative Fee paid in respect of that particular Contract. We do not intend to realize a profit from this fee. The Administrative Fee will stop at the Annuity Date.

Optional Rider Charges

If you purchase an optional Rider listed in the table below, we will deduct an annual charge from your Investment Options on a proportionate basis.

Following the Rider Effective Date, the charge is deducted every 3 month anniversary of your Contract Date (“Quarterly Contract Anniversary”). The Rider charge will be deducted while the Rider remains in effect and when the Rider terminates. The charge is deducted in arrears each Quarterly Contract Anniversary. If a Rider is purchased on a date other than a Quarterly Contract Anniversary, the Rider charge will be prorated the first time the charge is deducted.

If your Rider terminates on a Quarterly Contract Anniversary, the entire charge for the prior quarter will be deducted from the Contract Value on that anniversary. If the Rider terminates prior to a Quarterly Contract Anniversary, we will prorate the charge based on the Protected Payment Base as of the day the Rider terminates. Such prorated amount will be deducted from the Contract Value on the earlier of the day the Contract terminates or on the Quarterly Contract Anniversary immediately following the day the Rider terminates.

If you make a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal during a Contract Year, we will deduct the charge from the final payment made to you.

An optional Rider annual charge percentage may change if a Reset occurs under the Rider provisions. However, the annual charge percentage will not exceed the maximum annual charge percentage (indicated in the table below) for the applicable Rider. You may elect to opt-out of a Reset and your annual charge percentage will remain the same as it was before the Reset. If an Automatic Reset never occurs, the annual charge percentage established on the Rider Effective Date is guaranteed not to change. You can find more information about Protected Payment Base and Automatic Resets for each applicable rider in the OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT RIDERS section.

Annual Charge Percentage Table

Maximum

Current

Annual Charge

To determine the amount to be

Annual Charge

Percentage

deducted, the Annual Charge

The Charge is

Optional Rider

Percentage

Under the Rider

Percentage is multiplied by the:

deducted on each:

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Single)

0.80%

1.50%

Protected Payment Base

Quarterly Contract Anniversary

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Joint)

1.00%

1.75%

Protected Payment Base

Quarterly Contract Anniversary

Premium Taxes

Depending on your state of residence (among other factors), a tax may be imposed on your Purchase Payments (“premium tax”) at the time your Investment is made, at the time of a partial or full withdrawal, at the time any death benefit proceeds are paid, at annuitization or at such other time as taxes may be imposed. Tax rates ranging from 0% to 3.5% are currently in effect, but may change in the future. Premium tax is subject to state requirements. Some local jurisdictions also impose a tax.

If we pay any premium taxes attributable to Purchase Payments, we will impose a similar charge against your Contract Value. We normally will charge you when you annuitize some or all of your Contract Value. We reserve the right to impose this charge for applicable premium taxes and/or other taxes when you make a full or partial withdrawal, at the time any death benefit proceeds are paid, or when those taxes are incurred. For these purposes, “premium taxes” include any state or local premium or retaliatory taxes and any federal, state or local income, excise, business or any other type of tax (or component thereof) measured by or based upon, directly or indirectly, the amount of Purchase Payments we have received. We currently base this charge on your Contract Value, but we reserve the right to base this charge on the transaction amount, the aggregate amount of Purchase Payments we receive under your Contract, or any other amount, that in our sole discretion we deem appropriately reimburses us for premium taxes paid on this Contract.

We may also charge the Separate Account or your Contract Value for taxes attributable to the Separate Account or the Contract, including income taxes attributable to the Separate Account or to our operations with respect to the Contract, or taxes attributable, directly or indirectly, to Purchase Payments. Any such charge deducted from the Contract Value will be deducted on a proportionate basis. See HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED – Investing in Variable Investment Options – Calculating Subaccount Unit Values to see how such charges are deducted from the Separate Account. Currently, we do not impose any such charges.

Waivers and Reduced Charges

We may agree to waive or reduce charges under our Contracts, in situations where selling and/or maintenance costs associated with the Contracts are reduced, such as the sale of several Contracts to the same Contract Owner(s), sales of large Contracts, sales of Contracts in connection with a group or sponsored arrangement or mass transactions over multiple Contracts.

We will only waive or reduce such charges or credit additional amounts on any Contract where expenses associated with the sale or distribution of the Contract and/or costs associated with administering and maintaining the Contract are reduced. Any additional amounts will be added to the Contract when we apply Purchase Payments. We reserve the right to terminate waiver, reduced charge and crediting programs at any time, including for issued Contracts.

With respect to additional amounts as described above, in most states you may not receive any amount credited if you return your Contract during the Free Look period as described under WITHDRAWALS – Right to Cancel (“Free Look”).

Fund Expenses

Your Variable Account Value reflects advisory fees and other expenses incurred by the various Fund Portfolios, net of any applicable reductions and/or reimbursements. These fees and expenses may vary. Each Fund is governed by its own Board of Trustees, and your Contract does not fix or specify the level of expenses of any Portfolio. A Fund’s fees and expenses are described in detail in the applicable Fund Prospectus and SAI.

Some Investment Options available to you are “fund of funds”. A fund of funds portfolio is a fund that invests in other funds in addition to other investments that the portfolio may make. Expenses of fund of funds Investment Options may be higher than non fund of funds

Investment Options due to the two tiered level of expenses. See the Fund prospectuses for detailed portfolio expenses and other information before investing.

ANNUITIZATION

Selecting Your Annuitant

When you submit your Contract application, you must choose a sole Annuitant or Joint Annuitants. If you are buying a Qualified Contract, you must be the sole Annuitant. If you are buying a Non-Qualified Contract you may choose yourself and/or another person as Annuitant. Whether you have a sole or Joint Annuitants, you may choose a Contingent Annuitant. The Contingent Annuitant will not have any Contract benefits, including death benefit proceeds, until becoming the sole surviving Annuitant. You will not be able to add or change a sole or Joint Annuitant after your Contract is issued. However, if you are buying a Qualified Contract, you may add a Joint Annuitant on the Annuity Date. You will be able to add or change a Contingent Annuitant until your Annuity Date or the death of your sole Annuitant or both Joint Annuitants, whichever occurs first. However, once your Contingent Annuitant has become the Annuitant under your Contract, no additional Contingent Annuitant may be named. No Annuitant (Primary, Joint or Contingent) may be named upon or after reaching his or her 91^st birthday. We reserve the right to require proof of age or survival of the Annuitant(s).

Annuitization

Annuitization occurs on the Annuity Date when you convert your Contract from the accumulation phase to the annuitization (income) phase. You may choose both your Annuity Date and your Annuity Option. At the Annuity Date, you may elect to annuitize some or all of your Contract Value, less any applicable charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes, (the “Conversion Amount”), as long as such Conversion Amount annuitized is at least $10,000. We will send the annuity payments to the payee that you designate.

If you annuitize only a portion of this available Contract Value, you may have the remainder distributed, less any applicable charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes, and any optional Rider charge. This option of distribution may or may not be available, or may be available for only certain types of Contracts. Any such distribution will be made to you in a single sum if the remaining Conversion Amount is less than $10,000 on your Annuity Date. Distributions under your Contract may have tax consequences. You should consult a qualified tax adviser for information on full or partial annuitization.

If you annuitize only a portion of your Contract Value on your Annuity Date, you may, at that time, have the option to elect not to have the remainder of your Contract Value distributed, but instead to continue your Contract with that remaining Contract Value (a “continuing Contract”). If this option is available, you would then choose a second Annuity Date for your continuing Contract, and all references in this Prospectus to your “Annuity Date” would, in connection with your continuing Contract, be deemed to refer to that second Annuity Date. The second Annuity Date may not be later than the date specified in the Choosing Your Annuity Date section of this Prospectus. This option may not be available, or may be available only for certain types of Contracts. You should be aware that some or all of the payments received before the second Annuity Date may be fully taxable. We recommend that you contact a qualified tax adviser for more information if you are interested in this option.

Choosing Your Annuity Date

You should choose your Annuity Date when you submit your application or we will apply a default Annuity Date to your Contract. You may change your Annuity Date by notifying us, In Proper Form, at least ten Business Days prior to the earlier of your current Annuity Date or your new Annuity Date. Your Annuity Date cannot be earlier than your first Contract Anniversary. Adverse federal tax consequences may result if you choose an Annuity Date that is prior to an Annuitant’s attained age 591/2. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

If you have a sole Annuitant, your Annuity Date cannot be later than the sole Annuitant’s 95^th birthday. If you have Joint Annuitants, your Annuity Date cannot be later than your younger Joint Annuitant’s 95^th birthday. Different requirements may apply as required by any applicable state law or the Code. We may, at our sole discretion, allow you to extend your Annuity Date. We reserve the right, at any time, to not offer any extension to your Annuity Date regardless of whether we may have granted any extensions to you or to any others in the past.

If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, you may also be subject to additional restrictions. In order to meet the Code minimum distribution rules, your Required Minimum Distributions (RMDs) may begin earlier than your Annuity Date. For instance, under Section 401 of the Code (for Qualified Plans) and Section 408 of the Code (for IRAs), the entire interest under the Contract must be distributed to the Owner/Annuitant not later than the Owner/Annuitant’s Required Beginning Date (“RBD”), or distributions over the life of the Owner/Annuitant (or the Owner/Annuitant and his or her Beneficiary) must begin no later than the RBD. For more information see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

Default Annuity Date and Options

If you have a Non-Qualified Contract and you do not choose an Annuity Date when you submit your application, your Annuity Date will be your Annuitant’s 95^th birthday or your younger Joint Annuitant’s 95^th birthday, whichever applies. If you have a Qualified Contract and you do not choose an Annuity Date when you submit your application, your Annuity Date will be your Annuitant’s 95^th birthday. However some states’ laws may require a different Annuity Date. Certain Qualified Contracts may require distributions to occur at an earlier age.

If you have not specified an Annuity Option or do not instruct us otherwise, at your Annuity Date your Contract Value, less any charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes, will be annuitized (if this net amount is at least $10,000) and the net amount from your Variable Account Value will be converted into a fixed dollar annuity.

Additionally:


	•	If you have a Non-Qualified Contract, your default Annuity Option will be Life with a ten year Period Certain.

	•	If you have a Qualified Contract, your default Annuity Option will be Life with a five year Period Certain or a shorter period certain as may be required by federal regulation. If you are married, different requirements may apply. Please contact your plan administrator for further information, if applicable.

	•	If the net amount is less than $10,000, the entire amount will be distributed in one lump sum.

Choosing Your Annuity Option

You should carefully review the Annuity Options with a qualified tax adviser, and, for Qualified Contracts, reference should be made to the terms of the particular plan and the requirements of the Code for pertinent limitations regarding annuity payments, Required Minimum Distributions (“RMDs”), and other matters.

You may make 2 basic decisions about your annuity payments. First, you may choose the form of annuity payments (see Annuity Options below). Second, you may decide how often you want annuity payments to be made (the “frequency” of the payments). You may not change these selections after the Annuity Date.

Fixed Payments

You will receive fixed annuity payments, there are no variable annuity payments available. Fixed annuity payments are based on a fixed rate and the Annuity 2000 Mortality Table with the ages set back 10 years. Each periodic annuity payment will be equal to the initial annuity payment, unless you select a Joint and Survivor Life annuity with reduced survivor payments when the Primary Annuitant dies. Any net amount you convert to fixed annuity payments will be held in our General Account.

Annuity Options

Four Annuity Options are currently available under the Contract, although additional options may become available in the future. For other Annuity Options see OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT RIDERS.


1.	Life Only. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee during the Annuitant’s lifetime. Payments stop when the Annuitant dies.

2.	Life with Period Certain. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee during the Annuitant’s lifetime, with payments guaranteed for a specified period. You may choose to have payments guaranteed from 5 through 30 years (in full years only). The guaranteed period may be limited on Qualified Contracts based on your life expectancy.

3.	Joint and Survivor Life. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee during the lifetime of the Primary Annuitant. After the death of the Primary Annuitant, periodic payments will continue to be made during the lifetime of the secondary Annuitant named in the election. You may choose to have the payments during the lifetime of the surviving secondary Annuitant equal 50%, 662/3% or 100% of the original amount payable made during the lifetime of the Primary Annuitant (you must make this election when you choose your Annuity Option). If you elect a reduced payment based on the life of the secondary Annuitant, fixed annuity payments will be equal to 50% or 662/3% of the original fixed payment payable during the lifetime of the Primary Annuitant. Payments stop when both Annuitants have died.

4.	Period Certain Only. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee, guaranteed for a specified period. You may choose to have payments guaranteed from 10 through 30 years (in full years only). The guaranteed period may be limited on Qualified Contracts based on your life expectancy.

Periodic payment amounts will differ based on the Annuity Option selected. Generally, the longer the possible payment period, the lower the payment amount.

If the Annuitant dies before the guaranteed payments under Annuity Options 2 and 4 are completed, we will pay the remainder of the guaranteed payments to the first person among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to receive the remainder of the guaranteed payments:


	•	the Owner;

	•	the Joint Owner;

	•	the Beneficiary; or

	•	the Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to receive the remainder of the guaranteed payments), we will pay the remainder of the guaranteed payments to the Owner’s estate.

If the Owner dies on or after the Annuity Date, but payments have not yet been completed, then distributions of the remaining amounts payable under the Contract must be made at least as rapidly as the method of distribution that was being used at the date of the Owner’s death. All of the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract will be assumed by the first among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to assume the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract:


	•	the Joint Owner;

	•	the Beneficiary; or

	•	the Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to assume the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract), all of the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract will be assumed by the Owner’s estate.

For Qualified Contracts, please refer to the Choosing Your Annuity Date section in this Prospectus. If your Contract was issued in connection with a Qualified Plan subject to Title I of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (“ERISA”), your spouse’s consent may be required when you seek any distribution under your Contract, unless your Annuity Option is Joint and Survivor Life with survivor payments of at least 50%, and your spouse is your Joint Annuitant.

Your Annuity Payments

Payment Frequency

You may choose to have annuity payments made monthly, quarterly, semi-annually, or annually.

Your initial annuity payment must be at least $250. Depending on the net amount you annuitize, this requirement may limit your options regarding the period and/or frequency of annuity payments.

Payment Amount

Your Contract contains tables that we use to determine the amount of your annuity payments, taking into consideration the annuitized portion of your Contract Value at the Annuity Date. This amount will vary, depending on the annuity period and payment frequency you select. This amount will be larger in the case of shorter Period Certain annuities and smaller for longer Period Certain annuities. Similarly, this amount will be greater for a Life Only annuity than for a Joint and Survivor Life annuity, because we will expect to make payments for a shorter period of time on a Life Only annuity. If you do not choose the Period Certain Only annuity, this amount will also vary depending on the age of the Annuitant(s) on the Annuity Date and, for some Contracts in some states, the sex of the Annuitant(s).

The guaranteed income factors in our tables are based on an annual interest rate of 1.5% and the Annuity 2000 Mortality Table with the ages set back 10 years. Fixed annuity payments will be based on the periodic income factors in effect for your Contract on the Annuity Date which are at least the guaranteed income factors under the Contract.

DEATH BENEFITS

Death Benefits

Death benefit proceeds may be payable before the Annuity Date on proof of the sole surviving Annuitant’s death or of any Contract Owner while the Contract is in force. Any death benefit payable will be calculated on the “Notice Date”, which is the day on which we receive, In Proper Form, proof of death and instructions regarding payment of death benefit proceeds. If a Contract has multiple Beneficiaries, death benefit proceeds will be calculated when we first receive proof of death and instructions, In Proper Form, from any

Beneficiary. The death benefit proceeds still remaining to be paid to other Beneficiaries will fluctuate with the performance of the underlying Investment Options.

Death Benefit Proceeds

Death benefit proceeds will be payable on the Notice Date. Such proceeds will be reduced by any charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes. The death benefit proceeds may be payable in a single sum, as an Annuity Option available under the Contract, towards the purchase of any other Annuity Option we then offer, or in any other manner permitted by the IRS and approved by us. The Owner’s spouse may continue the Contract (see Death Benefits – Spousal Continuation). In addition, there may be legal requirements that limit the recipient’s Annuity Options and the timing of any payments. A recipient should consult a qualified tax adviser before making a death benefit election.

The death benefit proceeds will be paid to the first among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds, in the following order:


	•	Owner,

	•	Joint Owner,

	•	Beneficiary, or

	•	Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds), the proceeds will be payable to the Owner’s Estate.

Death Benefit Amount

The Death Benefit Amount as of any Business Day before the Annuity Date is equal to the Contract Value as of that day. We calculate the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date and the death benefit will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section above.

Spousal Continuation

Generally, a sole designated recipient who is the Owner’s spouse may elect to become the Owner (and sole Annuitant if the deceased Owner had been the Annuitant) and continue the Contract until the earliest of the spouse’s death, the death of the Annuitant, or the Annuity Date. The spousal continuation election must be made by the fifth anniversary of the death of the Contract Owner for Non-Qualified Contracts, or by December 31 of the calendar year in which the fifth anniversary of the Contract Owner’s death falls for Qualified Contracts. On the Notice Date, if the surviving spouse is deemed to have continued the Contract, we will set the Contract Value equal to the death benefit proceeds that would have been payable to the spouse as the deemed Beneficiary/designated recipient of the death benefit proceeds.

A Joint Owner who is the designated recipient, but not the Owner’s spouse, may not continue the Contract. Under IRS Guidelines, once a surviving spouse continues the Contract, the Contract may not be continued again in the event the surviving spouse remarries. If you have purchased an optional living benefit Rider, please refer to the Rider attached to your Contract to determine how any guaranteed amounts may be affected when a surviving spouse continues the Contract.

Death of Annuitant

If a sole surviving Annuitant dies before the Annuity Date, the amount of the death benefit will be equal to the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date and will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section.

If there is more than one Annuitant and an Annuitant who is not an Owner dies, no death benefit proceeds will be payable. The designated sole Annuitant will then be the first living person in the following order:


	•	a surviving Joint Annuitant, or

	•	a surviving Contingent Annuitant.

Death of Owner

If an Owner dies before the sole surviving Annuitant and before the Annuity Date, the amount of the death benefit will be equal to the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date and will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section and in accordance with the federal income tax distribution at death rules discussed in the FEDERAL TAX ISSUES section.

Non-Natural Owner

If you are a Non-Natural Owner of a Contract other than a Contract issued under a Qualified Plan as defined in Section 401 of the Code, the Primary Annuitant will be treated as the Owner of the Contract for purposes of the Non-Qualified Contract Distribution Rules. If there are Joint or Contingent Annuitants, the death benefit proceeds will be payable on proof of death of the first annuitant. If there is a change in the Primary Annuitant prior to the Annuity Date, such change will be treated as the death of the Owner (however, under the terms of your Contract, you cannot change the Primary Annuitant). The Death Benefit Amount will be: (a) the Contract Value, if the Non-Natural Owner elects to maintain the Contract and reinvest the Contract Value into the contract in the same amount as immediately prior to the distribution; or (b) the Contract Value, less any charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes, if the Non-Natural Owner elects a cash distribution and will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefits Proceeds section and in accordance with the federal income tax distribution at death rules discussed in the FEDERAL TAX ISSUES section.

Non-Qualified Contract Distribution Rules

The Contract is intended to comply with all applicable provisions of Code Section 72(s) and any successor provision, as deemed necessary by us to qualify the Contract as an annuity contract for federal income tax purposes. If an Owner of a Non-Qualified Contract dies before the Annuity Date, distribution of the death benefit proceeds must begin within 1 year after the Owner’s death or complete distribution within 5 years after the Owner’s death. In order to satisfy this requirement, the designated recipient must receive a final lump sum payment by the 5^th anniversary of the Contract Owner’s death, or elect to receive an annuity for life or over a period that does not exceed the life expectancy of the designated recipient with annuity payments that start within 1 year after the Owner’s death or, if permitted by the IRS, elect to receive a systematic distribution over a period not exceeding the beneficiary’s life expectancy using a method that would be acceptable for purposes of calculating the minimum distribution required under section 401(a)(9) of the Code. If an election to receive an annuity is not made within 60 days of our receipt of proof, In Proper Form, of the Owner’s death or, if earlier, 60 days (or shorter period as we permit) prior to the 1^st anniversary of the Owner’s death, the option to receive annuity payments is no longer available. If a Non-Qualified Contract has Joint Owners, this requirement applies to the first Contract Owner to die.

The Owner may designate that the Beneficiary will receive death benefit proceeds through annuity payments for life or life with Period Certain. The Owner must designate the payment method in writing in a form acceptable to us. The Owner may revoke the designation only in writing and only in a form acceptable to us. Once the Owner dies, the Beneficiary cannot revoke or modify the Owner’s designation.

Qualified Contract Distribution Rules

Under Internal Revenue Service regulations and our administrative procedures, if the Contract is owned under a Qualified Plan as defined in Sections 401, 457(b) or Sections 408, or 408A of the Code and the Annuitant dies before the Required Beginning Date, the payment of any death benefit proceeds must be made to the designated recipient in accordance with one of two rules. One rule generally requires the death benefit proceeds to commence distribution by December 31 of the calendar year following the calendar year of the Annuitant’s death and continue over the life of his or her Beneficiary (the “life expectancy method”). The second rule requires distribution of the entire death benefit proceeds no later than December 31 of the calendar year in which the 5^th anniversary of the Annuitant’s death falls (the “five-year rule”).

However, the life expectancy method and the five-year rule are modified if the sole primary Beneficiary is a surviving spouse. If the surviving spouse elects not to do an eligible rollover to an IRA or another existing eligible plan in his or her name, then he or she will be subject to the five-year rule. However, the surviving spouse may waive the five-year requirement and elect to take distributions over his or her life expectancy. If the surviving spouse elects to defer the commencement of required distributions beyond the 1^st anniversary of the Annuitant’s death, the surviving spouse may defer required distributions until the later of:


	•	December 31 of the year following the year the Annuitant died, or

	•	December 31 of the year in which the deceased Annuitant would have turned 701/2.

You are responsible for monitoring distributions that must be taken to meet IRS guidelines.

If the Annuitant dies after the commencement of RMDs (except in the case of a Roth IRA when RMDs do not apply) but before the Annuitant’s entire interest in the Contract (other than a Roth IRA) has been distributed, the remaining interest in the Contract must be distributed to the designated recipient at least as rapidly as under the distribution method in effect at the time of the Annuitant’s death.

WITHDRAWALS

Optional Withdrawals

You may, on or prior to your Annuity Date, withdraw all or a portion of the amount available under your Contract while the Annuitants are living and your Contract is in force. You may surrender your Contract and make a full withdrawal at any time. If you surrender your

Contract it will be terminated as of the Effective Date of the withdrawal. Beginning 30 days after your Contract Date, you also may make partial withdrawals from your Investment Options at any time. Currently, we are not requiring the 30-day waiting period on partial withdrawals, but we reserve the right to require a 30-day waiting period on partial withdrawals in the future. You may request to withdraw a specific dollar amount or a specific percentage of an Account Value or your Contract Value. You may choose to make your withdrawal from specified Investment Options. If you do not specify Investment Options, your withdrawal will be made from all of your Investment Options proportionately.

Each partial withdrawal must be for $500 or more. Pre-authorized partial withdrawals must be at least $250, except for pre-authorized withdrawals distributed by Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT), which must be at least $100. If your partial withdrawal from an Investment Option would leave a remaining Account Value in that Investment Option of less than $500, we also reserve the right, at our option, to transfer that remaining amount to your other Investment Options on a proportionate basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions.

If your partial withdrawal leaves you with a Contract Value of less than $1,000, or if your partial withdrawal request is for an amount exceeding the amount available for withdrawal, as described in the Amount Available for Withdrawal section below, we have the right, at our option, to terminate your Contract and send you the withdrawal proceeds. However, we will not terminate your Contract if you own an optional withdrawal benefit rider and a partial withdrawal reduces the Contract Value to an amount less than $1,000.

Amount Available for Withdrawal

The amount available for withdrawal is your Contract Value at the end of the Business Day on which your withdrawal request is effective, less any applicable optional Rider Charges, and any charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes. The amount we send to you (your “withdrawal proceeds”) will also reflect any required or requested federal and state income tax withholding. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES. If you own optional Riders, taking a withdrawal before a certain age or a withdrawal that is greater than the allowed annual withdrawal amount under a Rider, may result in adverse consequences such as a reduction in Rider benefits or the failure to receive lifetime withdrawals under the Rider.

You assume investment risk on Purchase Payments in the Subaccounts. As a result, the amount available to you for withdrawal from any Subaccount may be more or less than the total Purchase Payments you have allocated to that Subaccount.

Pre-Authorized Withdrawals

If your Contract Value is at least $5,000, you may select the pre-authorized withdrawal option, and you may choose monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual withdrawals. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum Contract Value amount but we reserve the right to enforce the minimum amount in the future. Each withdrawal must be for at least $250, except for withdrawals distributed by Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT), which must be at least $100. Each pre-authorized withdrawal is subject to federal income tax on its taxable portion and may be subject to a tax penalty of 10% if you have not reached age 591/2. Pre-authorized withdrawals cannot be used to continue the Contract beyond the Annuity Date. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES and THE GENERAL ACCOUNT. Additional information and options are set forth in the SAI.

Special Requirements for Full Withdrawals and Payments to Third Party Payees

Instructions for a full withdrawal and surrender of your Contract In Proper Form includes, among other things, a return of the original Contract or a lost contract affidavit. For your convenience, our Withdrawal Request form includes a lost contract affidavit for your use in providing us with your full withdrawal and surrender instructions. If you wish to have a full or partial withdrawal check made payable to a third-party payee, you must provide complete instructions and an original signature is required on the Withdrawal Request form or your withdrawal request instructions. If you wish to withdraw the entire amount available under your Contract, you must either return your Contract to us or sign and submit a Withdrawal Request form or a Lost Contract Affidavit if no Withdrawal Request form is completed.

Special Restrictions Under Qualified Plans

Qualified Plans may have additional rules regarding withdrawals from a Contract purchased under such a Plan. In general, if your Contract was issued under certain Qualified Plans, you may not withdraw amounts attributable to contributions made pursuant to a salary reduction agreement (as defined in Section 402(g)(3)(A) of the Code) except in cases of your:


	•	severance from employment,

	•	death,

	•	disability as defined in Section 72(m)(7) of the Code,


	•	reaching age 591/2, or

	•	hardship as defined for purposes of Section 401 of the Code.

These limitations do not affect certain rollovers or exchanges between Qualified Plans, and do not apply to rollovers from these Qualified Plans to an individual retirement account or individual retirement annuity.

Hardship withdrawals under the exception provided above are restricted to amounts attributable to salary reduction contributions, and do not include investment results. This additional restriction does not apply to salary reduction contributions made, or investment results earned, prior to dates specified in the Code.

Certain distributions, including rollovers, may be subject to mandatory withholding of 20% for federal income tax and to a tax penalty of 10% if the distribution is not transferred directly to the trustee of another Qualified Plan, or to the custodian of an individual retirement account or issuer of an individual retirement annuity. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES. Distributions may also trigger withholding for state income taxes. The tax and ERISA rules relating to withdrawals from Contracts issued to Qualified Plans are complex. We are not the administrator of any Qualified Plan. You should consult your qualified tax adviser and/or your Plan Administrator before you withdraw any portion of your Contract Value.

Effective Date of Withdrawal Requests

Withdrawal requests are normally effective on the Business Day we receive them In Proper Form. If you make Purchase Payments by check and submit a withdrawal request immediately afterwards, payment of your withdrawal proceeds may be delayed until we receive confirmation in our Annuities administrative office that your check has cleared.

Tax Consequences of Withdrawals

All withdrawals, including pre-authorized withdrawals, will generally have federal income tax consequences, which could include tax penalties. You should consult with a qualified tax adviser before making any withdrawal or selecting the pre-authorized withdrawal option. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

Right to Cancel (“Free Look”)

You may return your Contract for cancellation and a refund during your Free Look period. Your Free Look period is usually the 10-day period beginning on the day you receive your Contract, but may vary if required by state law. The amount of your refund may be more or less than the Purchase Payments you have made. If you return your Contract and it is post-marked during the Free Look period, it will be cancelled as of the date we receive your Contract. In most states, you will then receive a refund of your Contract Value, based upon the next determined Accumulated Unit Value (AUV) after we receive your Contract for cancellation, plus a refund of any amount that may have been deducted as Contract fees and charges, and minus any additional amount credited as described in CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Waivers and Reduced Charges. You bear the investment risk on any additional amount credited.

In some states we are required to refund your Purchase Payments. If your Contract was issued in such a state and you cancel your Contract during the Free Look period, we will return the greater of your Purchase Payments (less any withdrawals made) or the Contract Value. In addition, if your Contract was issued as an IRA and you return your Contract within 7 days after you receive it, we will return the greater of your Purchase Payments (less any withdrawals made) or the Contract Value.

Your Purchase Payments are allocated to the Investment Options you indicated on your application, unless otherwise required by state law. If state law requires that your Purchase Payments must be allocated to Investment Options different than you requested, we will comply with state requirements. At the end of the Free Look period, we will allocate your Purchase Payments based on your allocation instructions.

See ADDITIONAL INFORMATION – State Considerations.

For replacement business, the Free Look period may be extended and the amount returned (Purchase Payment versus Contract Value) may be different than for non-replacement business. Please consult with your Schwab Financial Consultant if you have any questions regarding your states Free Look period and the amount of any refund.

You will find a complete description of the Free Look period and amount to be refunded that applies to your Contract on the Contract’s cover page, or on a notice that accompanies your Contract.

If your Contract is issued in exchange for another annuity contract or a life insurance policy, our administrative procedures may vary, depending on the state in which your Contract is issued.

OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT RIDERS

General Information

You may purchase an optional Rider at anytime (if available). Your election to purchase an optional Rider must be received In Proper Form.

Schwab may limit you from purchasing some optional Riders based upon your age or other factors. You should work with your Schwab Financial Consultant to decide whether an optional Rider is appropriate for you.

Investment Allocation Requirements

At initial purchase of an optional living benefit rider and during the entire time that you own an optional living benefit Rider, you must allocate your entire Contract Value to an asset allocation program or Investment Options we make available for these Riders. You may allocate your Contract Value 100% among allowable Investment Options. Currently, the allowable Investment Options are as follows:


Allowable Investment Options

Schwab VIT Balanced Portfolio
Schwab VIT Balanced with Growth Portfolio
Schwab VIT Growth Portfolio

You may transfer your entire Contract Value between allowable Investment Options, subject to certain transfer limitations. See HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED – Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions. Keep in mind that you must allocate your entire Contract Value among the allowable Investment Options. If you do not allocate your entire Purchase Payment or Contract Value according to the requirements above, your Rider will terminate.

Allowable Investment Options. You may allocate your entire Contract Value among any of the allowable Investment Options listed in the table above.

By adding an optional living benefit Rider to your Contract, you agree to the above referenced investment allocation requirements for the entire period that you own a Rider. These requirements may limit the number of Investment Options that are otherwise available to you under your Contract. We reserve the right to add, remove or change allowable asset allocation programs or allowable Investment Options at any time. We may make such a change due to a fund reorganization, fund substitution, to help protect our ability to provide the guarantees under these riders, or otherwise. If such a change is required, we will provide you with reasonable notice (generally 90 calendar days unless we are required to give less notice) prior to the effective date of such change to allow you to reallocate your Contract Value to maintain your rider benefits. If you do not reallocate your Contract Value your rider will terminate.

We will send you written notice in the event any transaction made by you will involuntarily cause the Rider to terminate for failure to invest according to the investment allocation requirements. However, you will have 10 Business Days after the date of our written notice (“10 day period”), to instruct us to take appropriate corrective action to continue participation in an allowable asset allocation program or allowable Investment Options to continue the Rider.

Asset allocation does not guarantee future results, ensure a profit, or protect against losses. The investment allocation requirements may reduce overall volatility in investment performance, may reduce investment returns, and may reduce the likelihood that we will be required to make payments under the optional living benefit riders.

Multiple Rider Ownership

Only one withdrawal benefit rider (Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Single) or (Joint)) may be owned or in effect at the same time.

Withdrawal Benefit Rider Exchanges

Subject to availability, you may elect to exchange between Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Single) or (Joint) on any Contract Anniversary.

When you elect an exchange, you are terminating your existing Rider and purchasing a new Rider. The Initial Protected Payment Base under the new Rider will be equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. Generally, if your Contract Value is lower than the Protected Payment Base under your existing Rider, your election to exchange from one rider to another may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base, and Protected Payment Amount. In other words, your existing protected balances will not carryover to the new Rider. If you elect an exchange, you will be subject to the charge for the new Rider in effect at the time of the exchange. Only one exchange may be elected each Contract Year. Work with your Schwab Financial Consultant prior to electing an exchange.

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Single)

Purchasing the Rider

You may purchase this optional Rider if the age of each Annuitant is 85 years or younger on the date of purchase, the Contract is not issued as an Inherited IRA or Inherited Roth IRA and you allocate your entire Contract Value according to the Investment Allocation Requirements.

Rider Terms

Annual RMD Amount – The amount required to be distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Code Section 401(a)(9) (“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions in effect as of the Rider Effective Date.

Early Withdrawal – Any withdrawal that occurs before the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut) is 591/2 years of age.

Excess Withdrawal – Any withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) that occurs after the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut) is age 591/2 or older and exceeds the Protected Payment Amount.

Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing the Protected Payment Base. If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut) is 591/2 years of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base, less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year and will be reset on each Contract Anniversary to 5% of the Protected Payment Base computed on that date. If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut) is younger than 591/2 years of age, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to zero (0); however, once the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut) reaches age 591/2, the Protected Payment Amount will equal 5% of the Protected Payment Base and will be reset each Contract Anniversary. The initial Protected Payment Amount will depend upon the age of the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut).

Protected Payment Base – An amount used to determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under the provisions of this Rider. On the Rider Effective Date, the Protected Payment Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment if purchased at Contract issue or, if purchased after Contract issue, the Contract Value as of the Rider Effective Date.

Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset occurs.

Rider Effective Date – The date the guarantees and charges for the Rider become effective.

You will find information about an RMD Withdrawal in the Required Minimum Distributions subsection and information about Automatic Resets in the Reset of Protected Payment Base subsection below.

How the Rider Works

Beginning at age 591/2, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance, until the Rider terminates. On each Contract Anniversary, the Rider provides for Automatic Annual Resets of the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value if the Protected Payment Base is less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. Once the Rider is purchased, you cannot request a termination of the Rider (see the Termination subsection of this Rider for more information).

If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut) is 591/2 years of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is 5% of the Protected Payment Base. If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut) is younger than 591/2 years of age, the Protected Payment Amount is zero (0).

The Protected Payment Base may change over time. An Automatic Reset will increase the Protected Payment Base depending on the Contract Value on the Reset Date. A withdrawal that is less than or equal to the Protected Payment Amount will not change the Protected Payment Base. If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value (less the Protected Payment Amount) is lower than the Protected Payment Base at the time of withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn. For withdrawals that are greater than the Protected Payment Amount, see the Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount subsection.

Amounts withdrawn under this Rider will reduce the Contract Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees, charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise made under the provisions of the Contract. Withdrawals under this Rider are not annuity payouts. Annuity payouts generally receive a more favorable tax treatment than other withdrawals.

If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, including an IRA Contract, you are subject to restrictions on withdrawals you may take prior to a triggering event (e.g. reaching age 591/2, separation from service, disability) and you should consult your tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing this optional guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals and triggering events, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – IRAs and Qualified Plans.

Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount

When the oldest Owner (youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut) is 591/2 years of age or older, you may withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of market performance, until the Rider terminates. The Protected Payment Amount will be reduced by the amount withdrawn during the Contract Year and will be reset each Contract Anniversary to 5% of the Protected Payment Base. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year. If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged.

Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. If a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, we will (immediately following the withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base on a proportionate basis for the amount in excess of the Protected Payment Amount. (See example 4 in APPENDIX A for a numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base as a result of an Excess Withdrawal.) If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value (less the Protected Payment Amount) is lower than the Protected Payment Base, the Protected Payment Base will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn.

The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed the Protected Payment Amount.

For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

Early Withdrawal

If an Early Withdrawal occurs, we will (immediately following the Early Withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base either on a proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in a lower Protected Payment Base. See example 5 in APPENDIX A for a numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base as a result of an Early Withdrawal.

Required Minimum Distributions

No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:


	•	such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at that time,

	•	you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,

	•	the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only, and

	•	only RMD Withdrawals are made from the Contract during the Contract Year.

See example 6 in APPENDIX A for numerical examples that describe what occurs when only withdrawals of the Annual RMD Amount are made during a Contract Year and when withdrawals of the Annual RMD Amount plus other non-RMD Withdrawals are made during a Contract Year.

See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.

Depletion of Contract Value

If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut) is younger than age 591/2 when the Contract Value is zero (due to withdrawals, fees, market decline, or otherwise), the Rider will terminate.

If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut) is age 591/2 or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the Rider will terminate.

If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut) is age 591/2 or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) that did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount, the following will apply:


	•	the Protected Payment Amount will be paid each year until the date of death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant (first Annuitant in the case of a Non-Natural Owner),

	•	the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,

	•	no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the Contract, and

	•	the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.

Reset of Protected Payment Base

On and after each Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued. The limitations and restrictions on Purchase Payments and withdrawals, the deduction of Rider charges and any future reset options available on and after the Reset Date, will again apply and will be measured from that Reset Date. A reset occurs when the Protected Payment Base is changed to an amount equal to the Contract Value as of the Reset Date.

Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date, we will automatically reset the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value, if the Protected Payment Base is less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. The annual charge percentage may change as a result of any Automatic Reset (see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges).

Automatic Reset – Opt-Out Election. Within 60 days after a Contract Anniversary on which an Automatic Reset is effective, you have the option to reinstate the Protected Payment Base, Protected Payment Amount and annual charge percentage to their respective amounts immediately before the Automatic Reset. Any future Automatic Resets will continue in accordance with the Automatic Reset paragraph above.

If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be received, In Proper Form, within the same 60 day period after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset is effective.

Subsequent Purchase Payments

If we receive additional Purchase Payments after the Rider Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base by the amount of the Purchase Payments. However, for purposes of this Rider, we reserve the right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a total of all Purchase Payments received on or after the later of the 1^st Contract Anniversary or most recent Reset Date to exceed $100,000 without our prior approval.

Annuitization

If you annuitize the Contract at the maximum Annuity Date specified in your Contract and this Rider is still in effect at the time of your election and a Life Only fixed annuity option is chosen, the annuity payments will be equal to the greater of:


	•	the Life Only fixed annual payment amount based on the terms of your Contract, or

	•	the Protected Payment Amount in effect at the maximum Annuity Date.

will not be used in determining any annuity payments. Work with your Schwab Financial Consultant to determine if you should annuitize your Contract before the maximum Annuity Date or stay in the accumulation phase and continue to take withdrawals under the Rider.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

This Rider terminates upon the death of an Owner or sole surviving Annuitant. If the surviving spouse continues the Contract, the surviving spouse may re-purchase this Rider (if available). The existing protected balances will not carry over to the new Rider and will be based on the Contract Value at time of re-purchase.

The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit proceeds instead of continuing the Contract (see DEATH BENEFITS).

Termination

You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate on the earliest of:


	•	the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,

	•	the date of the death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant,

	•	for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of death of any Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent Annuitants,

	•	the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract,

	•	the day we are notified of a change in ownership of the Contract to a non-spouse Owner if the Contract is Non-Qualified (excluding changes in ownership to or from certain trusts or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut),

	•	the day the Contingent Annuitant becomes the Annuitant (if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut),

	•	the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit Rider,

	•	the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for additional information),

	•	the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, or

	•	the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut) is younger than age 591/2.

See the Depletion of Contract Value subsection for situations where the Rider will not terminate when the Contract Value is reduced to zero.

Sample Calculations

Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached APPENDIX A. The examples are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. These examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Joint)

Purchasing the Rider

You may purchase this optional Rider if you meet the following eligibility requirements:


	•	the Contract is issued as:


	•	Non-Qualified Contract (this Rider is not available if the Owner is a trust or other entity), or

	•	Qualified Contract under Code Section 408(a), 408(k), 408A or 408(p), except for Inherited IRAs and Inherited Roth IRAs,


	•	both Designated Lives are 85 years or younger on the date of purchase,

	•	you allocate your entire Contract Value according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,

	•	the Contract must be structured so that upon the death of one Designated Life, the surviving Designated Life may retain or assume ownership of the Contract, and

	•	any Annuitant must be a Designated Life.

For purposes of meeting the eligibility requirements, Designated Lives must be any one of the following:


	•	a sole Owner with the Owner’s Spouse designated as the sole primary Beneficiary,

	•	Joint Owners, where the Owners are each other’s Spouses, or

	•	if the Contract is issued as a custodial owned IRA, the beneficial owner must be the Annuitant and the Annuitant’s Spouse must be designated as the sole primary Beneficiary under the Contract. The custodian, under a custodial owned IRA, for the benefit of the beneficial owner, may be designated as sole primary Beneficiary provided that the Spouse of the beneficial owner is the sole primary Beneficiary of the custodial account.

If this Rider is added after Contract issue, naming your Spouse as the Beneficiary to meet eligibility requirements will not be considered a change of Annuitant on the Contract.

Rider Terms

Designated Lives (each a “Designated Life”) – Designated Lives must be natural persons who are each other’s spouses on the Rider Effective Date. Designated Lives will remain unchanged while this Rider is in effect.

To be eligible for lifetime benefits, the Designated Life must:


	•	be the Owner (or Annuitant, in the case of a custodial owned IRA),

	•	remain the Spouse of the other Designated Life and be the first in line of succession, as determined under the Contract, for payment of any death benefit.

Early Withdrawal – Any withdrawal that occurs before the youngest Designated Life is 591/2 years of age.

Excess Withdrawal – Any withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) that occurs after the youngest Designated Life is age 591/2 or older and exceeds the Protected Payment Amount.

Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing the Protected Payment Base. If the youngest Designated Life is 591/2 years of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base, less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year and will be reset on each Contract Anniversary to 5% of the Protected Payment Base computed on that date. If the youngest Designated Life is younger than 591/2 years of age, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to zero (0). However, once the youngest Designated Life reaches age 591/2, the Protected Payment Amount will equal 5% of the Protected Payment Base and will be reset each Contract Anniversary. The initial Protected Payment Amount will depend upon the age of the youngest Designated Life.

Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset occurs.

Rider Effective Date – The date the guarantees and charges for the Rider become effective.

Spouse – The Owner’s spouse who is treated as the Owner’s spouse pursuant to federal law. If the Contract is a custodial owned IRA, the Annuitant’s spouse who is treated as the Annuitant’s spouse pursuant to federal law.

Surviving Spouse – The surviving spouse of a deceased Owner (or Annuitant in the case of a custodial owned IRA).

You will find information about an RMD Withdrawal in the Required Minimum Distributions subsection and information about Automatic Resets in the Reset of Protected Payment Base subsection below.

How the Rider Works

If the youngest Designated Life is 591/2 years of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is 5% of the Protected Payment Base. If the youngest Designated Life is younger than 591/2 years of age, the Protected Payment Amount is zero (0).

Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount

When the youngest Designated Life is 591/2 years of age or older, you may withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of market performance, until the Rider terminates. The Protected Payment Amount will be reduced by the amount withdrawn during the Contract Year and will be reset each Contract Anniversary to 5% of the Protected Payment Base. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year. If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged.

The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed the Protected Payment Amount.

For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

Early Withdrawal

Required Minimum Distributions

No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:


	•	such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at that time,

	•	you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,

	•	the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only,

	•	the youngest Designated Life is age 591/2 or older, and

	•	only RMD Withdrawals are made from the Contract during the Contract Year.

See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.

Depletion of Contract Value

If the youngest Designated Life is younger than age 591/2 when the Contract Value is zero (due to withdrawals, fees, market decline, or otherwise), the Rider will terminate.

If the youngest Designated Life is age 591/2 or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the Rider will terminate.

If the youngest Designated Life is age 591/2 or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) that did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount, the following will apply:


	•	the Protected Payment Amount will be paid each year until the death of all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime benefits,

	•	the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,

	•	no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the Contract, and

	•	the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.

Reset of Protected Payment Base

If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be received, In Proper Form, within the same 60 day period after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset is effective.

Subsequent Purchase Payments

Annuitization


	•	the Life Only fixed annual payment amount based on the terms of your Contract, or

	•	the Protected Payment Amount in effect at the maximum Annuity Date.

If you annuitize the Contract at any time prior to the maximum Annuity Date specified in your Contract, your annuity payments will be determined in accordance with the terms of your Contract. The Protected Payment Base and Protected Payment Amount under this Rider will not be used in determining any annuity payments. Work with your Schwab Financial Consultant to determine if you should annuitize your Contract before the maximum Annuity Date or stay in the accumulation phase and continue to take withdrawals under the Rider.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

If the Owner dies and the Surviving Spouse (who is also a Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits) elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, the Surviving Spouse may continue to take withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount under this Rider, until the Rider terminates.

The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit proceeds instead of continuing the Contract (see DEATH BENEFITS).

Ownership and Beneficiary Changes

Changes to the Contract Owner, Annuitant and/or Beneficiary designations and changes in marital status, including a dissolution of marriage, may adversely affect the benefits of this Rider. A particular change may make a Designated Life ineligible to receive lifetime income benefits under this Rider. As a result, the Rider may remain in effect and you may pay for benefits that you will not receive. You are strongly advised to work with your Schwab Financial Consultant and consider your options prior to making any Owner, Annuitant and/or Beneficiary changes to your Contract.

Termination

You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate on the earliest of:


	•	the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,

	•	the date of the death of all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime benefits,

	•	upon the death of the first Designated Life, if a death benefit is payable and a Surviving Spouse who chooses to continue the Contract is not a Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits,

	•	upon the death of the first Designated Life, if a death benefit is payable and the Contract is not continued by a Surviving Spouse who is a Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits,

	•	if both Designated Lives are Joint Owners and there is a change in marital status, the Rider will terminate upon the death of the first Designated Life who is a Contract Owner,

	•	the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract,

	•	the day that neither Designated Life is an Owner (or Annuitant, in the case of a custodial owned IRA) (this bullet does not apply if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut),

	•	the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit Rider,

	•	the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for additional information),

	•	the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, or

	•	the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero if the youngest Designated Life is younger than age 591/2.

See the Depletion of Contract Value subsection for situations where the Rider will not terminate when the Contract Value is reduced to zero.

Sample Calculations

PACIFIC LIFE AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT

Pacific Life

Pacific Life Insurance Company is a life insurance company domiciled in Nebraska. Along with our subsidiaries and affiliates, our operations include life insurance, annuity, pension and institutional products, mutual funds, broker-dealer operations, and investment advisory services. At the end of 2011, we had $296.3 billion of individual life insurance in force and total admitted assets of approximately $95.7 billion.

We are authorized to conduct our life insurance and annuity business in the District of Columbia and in all states except New York. Our executive office is located at 700 Newport Center Drive, Newport Beach, California 92660.

We were originally organized on January 2, 1868, under the name “Pacific Mutual Life Insurance Company of California” and reincorporated as “Pacific Mutual Life Insurance Company” on July 22, 1936. On September 1, 1997, we converted from a mutual life insurance company to a stock life insurance company ultimately controlled by a mutual holding company and were authorized by California regulatory authorities to change our name to Pacific Life Insurance Company. On September 1, 2005, Pacific Life changed from a California corporation to a Nebraska corporation. Pacific Life is a subsidiary of Pacific LifeCorp, a holding company, which, in turn, is a subsidiary of Pacific Mutual Holding Company, a mutual holding company. Under their respective charters, Pacific Mutual Holding Company must always hold at least 51% of the outstanding voting stock of Pacific LifeCorp, and Pacific LifeCorp must always own 100% of the voting stock of Pacific Life. Owners of Pacific Life’s annuity contracts and life insurance policies have certain membership interests in Pacific Mutual Holding Company, consisting principally of the right to vote on the election of the Board of Directors of the mutual holding company and on other matters, and certain rights upon liquidation or dissolutions of the mutual holding company.

Our subsidiary, Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD) serves as the principal underwriter (distributor) for the Contracts. PSD is located at 700 Newport Center Drive, Newport Beach, California 92660. We and PSD entered into a selling agreement with Schwab, whose Schwab Financial Consultants are authorized by state insurance departments to sell the Contracts.

We may provide you with reports of our ratings both as an insurance company and as to our claims-paying ability with respect to our General Account assets.

Separate Account A

Separate Account A was established on September 7, 1994 as a separate account of ours, and is registered with the SEC under the Investment Company Act of 1940 (the “1940 Act”), as a type of investment company called a “unit investment trust.” We established the Separate Account under the laws of the state of California. The Separate Account is maintained under the laws of the state of Nebraska.

Obligations arising under your Contract are our general corporate obligations. We are also the legal owner of the assets in the Separate Account. Assets of the Separate Account attributed to the reserves and other liabilities under the Contract and other contracts issued by us that are supported by the Separate Account may not be charged with liabilities arising from any of our other business; any income, gain or loss (whether or not realized) from the assets of the Separate Account are credited to or charged against the Separate Account without regard to our other income, gain or loss.

We may invest money in the Separate Account in order to commence its operations and for other purposes, but not to support contracts other than variable annuity contracts. A portion of the Separate Account’s assets may include accumulations of charges we make against the Separate Account and investment results of assets so accumulated. These additional assets are ours and we may transfer them to our General Account at any time; however, before making any such transfer, we will consider any possible adverse impact the transfer might have on the Separate Account. Subject to applicable law, we reserve the right to transfer our assets in the Separate Account to our General Account.

The Separate Account may not be the sole investor in the Funds. Investment in a Fund by other separate accounts in connection with variable annuity and variable life insurance contracts may create conflicts. See the accompanying Prospectus and SAI for the Funds for more information.

FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS

As of December 31, 2011, no contracts were issued. As a result, no condensed financial information is included in this Prospectus.

FEDERAL TAX ISSUES

The following summary of federal income tax issues is based on our understanding of current tax laws and regulations, which may be changed by legislative, judicial or administrative action. The summary is general in nature and is not intended as tax advice. Moreover, it does not consider any applicable foreign, state or local tax laws. Neither us, nor Schwab or Schwab Financial Consultants make any guarantee regarding the tax status, federal, foreign, state or local, of any Contract or any transaction involving the Contracts. Accordingly, you should consult a qualified tax adviser for complete information and advice before purchasing a Contract. Additional tax information is included in the SAI.

Diversification Requirements and Investor Control

Section 817(h) of the Code provides that the investments underlying a variable annuity must satisfy certain diversification requirements in order for the contract to be treated as an annuity contract and qualify for tax deferral. We believe the underlying Variable Investment Options for the contract meet these requirements. Details on these diversification requirements appear in the Fund SAIs.

In addition, for a variable annuity contract to qualify for tax deferral, assets in the separate accounts supporting the contract must be considered to be owned by the insurance company and not by the contract owner. Under current U.S. tax law, if a contract owner has excessive control over the investments made by a separate account, or the underlying fund, the contract owner will be taxed currently on income and gains from the account or fund. In other words, in such a case of investor control the contract owner would not derive the tax benefits normally associated with variable annuities. For more information regarding investor control, please refer to the contract SAI.

Taxation of Annuities – General Provisions

Section 72 of the Code governs the taxation of annuities in general, and we designed the Contracts to meet the requirements of Section 72 of the Code. We believe that, under current law, the Contract will be treated as an annuity for federal income tax purposes if the Contract Owner is a natural person or an agent for a natural person, and that we (as the issuing insurance company), and not the Contract Owner(s), will be treated as the owner of the investments underlying the Contract. Accordingly, no tax should be payable by you as a Contract Owner as a result of any increase in Contract Value until you receive money under your Contract. You should, however, consider how amounts will be taxed when you do receive them. The following discussion assumes that your Contract will be treated as an annuity for federal income tax purposes.

Non-Qualified Contracts – General Rules

These general rules apply to Non-Qualified Contracts. As discussed below, however, tax rules may differ for Qualified Contracts and you should consult a qualified tax adviser if you are purchasing a Qualified Contract.

Taxes Payable

A Contract Owner is not taxed on the increases in the value of a Contract until an amount is received or deemed to be received. An amount could be received or deemed to be received, for example, if there is a partial distribution, a lump sum distribution, an Annuity payment or a material change in the Contract or if any portion of the Contract is pledged or assigned. See the Addition of Optional Rider or Material Change to Contract section below. Increases in Contract Value that are received or deemed to be received are taxable to the Contract Owner as ordinary income. Distributions of net investment income or capital gains that each Subaccount receives from its corresponding Portfolio are automatically reinvested in such Portfolio unless we, on behalf of the Separate Account, elect otherwise. As noted above, you will be subject to federal income taxes on the investment income from your Contract only when it is distributed to you.

Beginning in 2013, any taxable distribution of the investment income from your Contract may also be subject to a net investment income tax of 3.8%. This tax applies to various investment income such as interest, dividends, royalties, payments from annuities, and the disposition of property, but only to the extent a married taxpayer’s modified adjusted gross income exceeds $250,000 ($200,000 if single). Please speak to your tax advisor about this new tax.

Non-Natural Persons as Owners

If a contract is not owned or held by a natural person or as agent for a natural person, the contract generally will not be treated as an “annuity” for tax purposes, meaning that the contract owner will be subject to current tax on annual increases in Contract Value at ordinary income rates unless some other exception applies. Certain entities, such as some trusts, may be deemed to be acting as agents for natural persons. Corporations, including S corps, C corps, LLCs, partnerships and FLPs, and tax exempt entities are non-natural persons that will not be deemed to be acting as agents for natural persons.

Addition of Optional Rider or Material Change to Contract

The addition of a rider to the Contract, or a material change in the Contract’s provisions, such as a change in Contract ownership or an assignment of the Contract, could cause it to be considered newly issued or entered into for tax purposes, and thus could cause a taxable event or the Contract to lose certain grandfathered tax status. Please contact your tax adviser for more information.

Taxes Payable on Withdrawals Prior to the Annuity Date

Amounts you withdraw before annuitization, including amounts withdrawn from your Contract Value in connection with partial withdrawals for payment of any charges and fees, including registered investment advisory fees, will be treated first as taxable income to the extent that your Contract Value exceeds the aggregate of your Purchase Payments reduced by non-taxable amounts previously received (investment in the Contract), and then as non-taxable recovery of your Purchase Payments. Therefore, you include in your gross income the smaller of: a) the amount of the partial withdrawal, or b) the amount by which your Contract Value immediately before you receive the distribution exceeds your investment in the Contract at that time.

If at the time of a partial withdrawal your Contract Value does not exceed your investment in the Contract, then the withdrawal will not be includable in gross income and will simply reduce your investment in the Contract. Exceptions to this rule are distributions in full discharge of your Contract (a full surrender) or distributions from contracts issued and investments made before August 14, 1982.

The assignment or pledge of (or agreement to assign or pledge) the value of the Contract for a loan will be treated as a withdrawal subject to these rules. You should consult your tax adviser for additional information regarding taking a partial or a full distribution from your Contract.

Multiple Contracts (Aggregation Rule)

Multiple Non-Qualified Contracts that are issued after October 21, 1988, by us or our affiliates to the same Owner during the same calendar year are treated as one Contract for purposes of determining the taxation of distributions (the amount includible in gross income under Code Section 72(e)) prior to the Annuity Date from any of the Contracts. A Contract received in a tax-free exchange under Code Section 1035 may be treated as a new Contract for this purpose. For Contracts subject to the Aggregation Rule, the values of the Contracts and the investments in the Contracts should be added together to determine the taxation under Code Section 72(e). Withdrawals will be treated first as withdrawals of income until all of the income from all such Contracts is withdrawn. The Treasury Department has specific authority under Code Section 72(e)(11) to issue regulations to prevent the avoidance of the income-out-first rules for withdrawals prior to the Annuity Date through the serial purchase of Contracts or otherwise. As of the date of this Prospectus there are no regulations interpreting these aggregation provisions.

10% Tax Penalty Applicable to Certain Withdrawals and Annuity Payments

The Code provides that the taxable portion of a withdrawal or other distribution may be subject to a tax penalty equal to 10% of that taxable portion unless the withdrawal is:


	•	made on or after the date you reach age 591/2,

	•	made by a Beneficiary after your death,

	•	attributable to your becoming disabled,

	•	any payment made under an immediate annuity,

	•	attributable to an investment in the Contract made prior to August 14, 1982, or

	•	any distribution that is a part of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (Code Section 72(q) payments) made (at least annually) over your life (or life expectancy) or the joint lives (or life expectancies) of you and your designated beneficiary.

Additional exceptions may apply to certain Qualified Contracts (see Taxes Payable on Annuity Payments and the applicable Qualified Contracts).

Distributions After the Annuity Date

After you annuitize, a portion of each annuity payment you receive under a Contract generally will be treated as a partial recovery of Investments (as used here, “Investments” means the aggregate Purchase Payments less any amounts that were previously received under the Contract but not included in income) and will not be taxable. (In certain circumstances, subsequent modifications to an initially-established payment pattern may result in the imposition of a tax penalty.) The remainder of each annuity payment will be taxed as ordinary income. However, after the full amount of aggregate Investments has been recovered, the full amount of each annuity payment will be taxed as ordinary income. Exactly how an annuity payment is divided into taxable and non-taxable portions depends on the period over which annuity payments are expected to be received, which in turn is governed by the form of annuity selected and, where a

lifetime annuity is chosen, by the life expectancy of the Annuitant(s) or payee(s). Such a payment may also be subject to a tax penalty if taken prior to age 591/2.

For periodic (annuity) payments, we will default your state tax withholding (as applicable) based upon the marital status and allowance(s) provided for your federal taxes or, if no withholding instructions are provided, we will default to either a married person with 3 exemptions or your resident state’s prescribed withholding default (if applicable). Please consult with a tax advisor for additional information, including whether your resident state has a specific version of the W-4P form that should be submitted to us with state-specific income tax information.

Same-Sex Spouses

Pursuant to Section 3 of the federal Defense of Marriage Act (“DOMA”), same-sex marriages currently are not recognized for purposes of federal law. Therefore, the favorable income-deferral options afforded by federal tax law to an opposite-sex spouse under Internal Revenue Code sections 72(s) and 401(a)(9) are currently NOT available to a same-sex spouse. Same-sex spouses who own or are considering the purchase of annuity products that provide benefits based upon status as a spouse should consult a tax advisor. To the extent that an annuity contract or certificate accords to spouses other rights or benefits that are not affected by DOMA, same-sex spouses remain entitled to such rights or benefits to the same extent as any annuity holder’s spouse.

Distributions to Beneficiary After Contract Owner’s Death

Generally, the same tax rules apply to amounts received by the Beneficiary as those that apply to the Contract Owner, except that the early withdrawal tax penalty does not apply. Thus, any annuity payments or lump sum withdrawal will be divided into taxable and non-taxable portions.

If death occurs after the Annuity Date, but before the expiration of a period certain option, the Beneficiary will recover the balance of the Investments as payments are made and may be allowed a deduction on the final tax return for the unrecovered Investments. A lump sum payment taken by the Beneficiary in lieu of remaining monthly annuity payments is not considered an annuity payment for tax purposes. The portion of any lump sum payment to a Beneficiary in excess of aggregate unrecovered Investments would be subject to income tax.

Contract Owner’s Estate

Generally, any amount payable to a Beneficiary after the Contract Owner’s death, whether before or after the Annuity Date, will be included in the estate of the Contract Owner for federal estate tax purposes. If the inclusion of the value of the Contract triggers a federal estate tax to be paid, the Beneficiary may be able to use a deduction called Income in Respect of Decedent (IRD) in calculating the income taxes payable upon receipt of the death benefit proceeds. In addition, designation of a non-spouse Beneficiary who either is 371/2 or more years younger than a Contract Owner or is a grandchild of a Contract Owner may have Generation Skipping Transfer Tax (GSTT) consequences under section 2601 of the Code. You should consult with a qualified tax advisor if you have questions about federal estate tax, IRD, or GSTT.

Gifts of Annuity Contracts

Generally, gifts of Non-Qualified Contracts prior to the annuity start date will trigger tax reporting to the donor on the gain on the Contract, with the donee getting a stepped-up basis for the amount included in the donor’s income. The 10% early withdrawal tax penalty and gift tax also may be applicable. This provision does not apply to transfers between spouses or incident to a divorce, or transfers to and from a trust acting as agent for the Owner or the Owner’s spouse.

Tax Withholding for Non-Qualified Contracts

Unless you elect to the contrary, any amounts you receive under your Contract that are attributable to investment income will be subject to withholding to meet federal income tax obligations. For nonperiodic distributions, you will have the option to provide us with withholding information at the time of your withdrawal request. If you do not provide us with withholding information, we will generally withhold 10% of the taxable distribution amount and remit it to the IRS. For periodic (annuity) payments, the rate of withholding will be determined on the basis of the withholding information you provide to us. If you do not provide us with withholding information, we are required to determine the Federal income tax withholding, from every annuity payment, as if you are a married person with 3 exemptions. State and local withholding may apply different defaults and will be determined by applicable law.

Certain states have indicated that pension and annuity withholding will apply to payments made to residents.

Please call (800) 722-4448 with any questions about the required withholding information. Schwab Financial Consultants may call us at (800) 610-4823.

Tax Withholding for Non-resident Aliens or Non U.S. Persons

Taxable distributions to Contract Owners who are non-resident aliens or other non U.S. persons are generally subject to U.S. federal income tax withholding at a 30% rate, unless a lower treaty rate applies. Prospective foreign owners are advised to consult with a tax advisor regarding the U.S., state and foreign tax treatment of a Contract.

Exchanges of Non-Qualified Contracts (1035 Exchanges)

You may make your initial or an additional Purchase Payment through an exchange of an existing annuity contract or endowment life insurance contract pursuant to Section 1035 of the Code (a 1035 exchange). The exchange can be effected by completing the Transfer/Exchange form, indicating in the appropriate section of the form that you are making a 1035 exchange and submitting any applicable state replacement form. The form is available by calling your Schwab Financial Consultant if you are working with one, or call a Schwab Annuity Specialist at (888) 311-4887. If you are a Schwab Financial Consultant, please call Pacific Life at (800) 610-4823. Once completed, the form should be mailed to Pacific Life. If you are making an initial Purchase Payment, a completed Contract application should also be attached.

In general terms, Section 1035 of the Code provides that no gain or loss is recognized when you exchange one annuity or life insurance contract for another annuity contract. Transactions under Section 1035, however, may be subject to special rules and may require special procedures and record keeping, particularly if the exchanged annuity contract was issued prior to August 14, 1982. You should consult your tax adviser prior to effecting a 1035 exchange.

Partial 1035 Exchanges

A partial exchange is the direct transfer of only a portion of an existing annuity’s Contract Value to a new annuity contract. Rev. Proc. 2011-38 significantly eased the restrictions on partial transfers adopted by Rev. Proc. 2008-24. Under Rev. Proc. 2011-38, the 12 month period is reduced to 180 days, so that a partial exchange will be treated as tax-free under Code Section 1035 if there are no distributions, from either annuity, within 180 days of the partial 1035 exchange. In addition, annuity payments that satisfy the newly enacted partial annuitization rule of Code Section 72(a)(2) will not be treated as a distribution from either the old or new contract. Rev. Proc. 2011-38 also replaces Rev. Proc. 2008-24’s automatic characterization of a transfer as a distribution taxable under Code Section 72(e) if it did not qualify as a tax-free exchange under Code Section 1035 with an analysis by the IRS, using general tax principles, to determine the substance, and thus the treatment of, the transaction. Rev. Proc. 2011-38 applies to partial exchanges on or after October 24, 2011. Rev. Proc. 2008-24 applies to partial exchanges that were effective before October 24, 2011.

You should consult your tax adviser prior to effecting a partial 1035 exchange.

Impact of Federal Income Taxes

In general, in the case of Non-Qualified Contracts, if you are an individual and expect to accumulate your Contract Value over a relatively long period of time without making significant withdrawals, there may be federal income tax advantages in purchasing such a Contract. This is because any increase in Contract Value is not subject to current taxation. Income taxes are deferred until the money is withdrawn, at which point taxation occurs only on the gain from the investment in the Contract. With income taxes deferred, you may accumulate more money over the long term through a variable annuity than you may through non-tax-deferred investments. The advantage may be greater if you decide to liquidate your Contract Value in the form of monthly annuity payments after your retirement, or if your tax rate is lower at that time than during the period that you held the Contract, or both.

When withdrawals or distributions are taken from the variable annuity, the gain is taxed as ordinary income. This may be a potential disadvantage because money that had been invested in other types of assets may qualify for a more favorable federal tax rate. For example, in 2011 the tax rate applicable both to the sale of capital gain assets held more than 1 year and to the receipt of qualifying dividends by individuals is generally 15% (0% for lower-income individuals). In contrast, an ordinary income tax rate of up to 35% applies to taxable withdrawals on distributions from a variable annuity in 2011. Also, withdrawals or distributions taken from a variable annuity prior to attaining age 591/2 may be subject to a tax penalty equal to 10% of the taxable portion, although exceptions to the tax penalty may apply.

An owner of a variable annuity cannot deduct or offset losses on transfers to or from Subaccounts, or at the time of any partial withdrawals. If you surrender your Contract and your Contract Value is less than the aggregate of your investments in the Contract (reduced by any previous non-taxable distributions), there may be a deductible ordinary income loss, although the deduction may be limited. Consult with your tax adviser regarding the impact of federal income taxes on your specific situation.

Taxes on Pacific Life

Although the Separate Account is registered as an investment company, it is not a separate taxpayer for purposes of the Code. The earnings of the Separate Account are taxed as part of our operations. No charge is made against the Separate Account for our federal income taxes (excluding the charge for premium taxes), but we will review, periodically, the question of charges to the Separate Account

or your Contract for such taxes. Such a charge may be made in future years for any federal income taxes that would be attributable to the Separate Account or to our operations with respect to your Contract, or attributable, directly or indirectly, to investments in your Contract.

Under current law, we may incur state and local taxes (in addition to premium taxes) in several states. At present, these taxes are not significant and they are not charged against the Contract or the Separate Account. If there is a material change in applicable state or local tax laws, the imposition of any such taxes upon us that are attributable to the Separate Account or to our operations with respect to your Contract may result in a corresponding charge against the Separate Account or your Contract.

Given the uncertainty of future changes in applicable federal, state or local tax laws, we cannot appropriately describe the effect a tax law change may have on taxes that would be attributable to the Separate Account or your Contract.

Qualified Contracts – General Rules

The Contracts are available to a variety of Qualified Plans and IRAs. Tax restrictions and consequences for Contracts under each type of Qualified Plan and IRAs differ from each other and from those for Non-Qualified Contracts. No attempt is made herein to provide more than general information about the use of the Contract with the various types of Qualified Plans and IRAs. Participants under such Qualified Plans, as well as Contract Owners, Annuitants and Beneficiaries, are cautioned that the rights of any person to any benefits under such Qualified Plans may be subject to the terms and conditions of the Plans themselves or limited by applicable law, regardless of the terms and conditions of the Contract issued in connection therewith.

Tax Deferral

It is important to know that Qualified Plans such as 401(k)s, as well as IRAs, are already tax-deferred. Therefore, an annuity contract should be used to fund an IRA or Qualified Plan to benefit from the annuity’s features other than tax deferral. Other benefits of using a variable annuity to fund a Qualified Plan or an IRA include the lifetime income options, guaranteed death benefit options and the ability to transfer among Investment Options. You should consider if the Contract is a suitable investment if you are investing through a Qualified Plan or IRA.

Registered Investment Advisory Fees

For Qualified Contracts, withdrawals to pay registered investment advisory fees will not be treated as distributions for tax purposes, and therefore will not be reported on a Form 1099-R.

Taxes Payable

Generally, amounts received from Qualified Contracts are taxed as ordinary income under Section 72, to the extent that they are not treated as a tax free recovery of contributions. Different rules apply for Roth IRAs. Consult your tax advisor before requesting a distribution from a Qualified Contract.

10% Tax Penalty for Early Withdrawals

Generally, distributions from IRAs and Qualified Plans that occur before you attain age 591/2 are subject to a 10% tax penalty imposed on the amount of the distribution that is includable in gross income, with certain exceptions. These exceptions include distributions:


	•	made to a beneficiary after the owner’s/participant’s death,

	•	attributable to the owner/participant becoming disabled under Section 72(m)(7),

	•	that are part of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (also referred to as SEPPs or 72(t) payments) made (at least annually) over your life (or life expectancy) or the joint lives (or joint life expectancies) of you and your designated beneficiary,

	•	for certain higher education expenses (IRAs only),

	•	used to pay for certain health insurance premiums or medical expenses (IRAs only),

	•	for costs related to the purchase of your first home (IRAs only), and

	•	(except for IRAs) made to an employee after separation from service after reaching age 55 (or age 50 in the case of a qualified public safety employee).

Tax Withholding for Qualified Contracts

Distributions from a Contract under a Qualified Plan (not including an individual retirement annuity subject to Code Section 408 or Code Section 408A) to an employee, surviving spouse, or former spouse who is an alternate payee under a qualified domestic relations

order, in the form of a lump sum settlement or periodic annuity payments for a fixed period of fewer than 10 years are subject to mandatory income tax withholding of 20% of the taxable amount of the distribution, unless:


	•	the distributee directs the transfer of such amounts in cash to another Qualified Plan or a traditional IRA, or

	•	the payment is a minimum distribution required under the Code.

The taxable amount is the amount of the distribution less the amount allocable to after-tax contributions. All other types of taxable distributions are subject to withholding unless the distributee elects not to have withholding apply.

For periodic (annuity) payments, the rate of withholding will be determined on the basis of the withholding information you provide to us. If you do not provide us with withholding information, we are required to determine the Federal income tax withholding, from every annuity payment, as if you are a married person with 3 exemptions. State and local withholding may apply different defaults and will be determined by applicable law.

Certain states have indicated that pension and annuity withholding will apply to payments made to residents.

IRAs and Other Qualified Contracts with Optional Benefit Riders

As of the date of this Prospectus, there are special considerations for purchases of any optional living benefit riders. IRS regulations state that Individual Retirement Accounts (IRAs) may generally not invest in life insurance contracts. We believe that these regulations do not prohibit the optional living benefit riders from being added to your Contract if it is issued as a Traditional IRA, Roth IRA, SEP IRA or SIMPLE IRA. However, the law is unclear and it is possible that a Contract that has optional living benefit riders and is issued as a Traditional IRA, Roth IRA, SEP IRA or SIMPLE IRA could be disqualified and may result in increased taxes to the Owner.

Similarly, section 401 plans, 457(b) annuities and IRAs (but not Roth IRAs) can only offer incidental death benefits. To the extent that the optional benefit riders alter the timing or the amount of the payment of distributions under a Qualified Contract, the riders cannot be paid out in violation of the minimum distribution rules of the Code.

It is our understanding that the charges relating to the optional benefit riders are not subject to current taxation and we will not report them as such. However, the IRS may determine that these charges should be treated as partial withdrawals subject to current income taxation to the extent of any gain and, if applicable, the 10% tax penalty. We reserve the right to report the rider charges as partial withdrawals if we believe that we would be expected to report them in accordance with IRS regulations.

Required Minimum Distributions

The regulations provide that you cannot keep assets in Qualified Plans or IRAs indefinitely. Eventually they are required to be distributed; at that time (the Required Beginning Date (RBD)), Required Minimum Distributions (RMDs) are the amount that must be distributed each year.

Under Section 401 of the Code (for Qualified Plans) and Section 408 of the Code (for IRAs), the entire interest under the Contract must be distributed to the Owner/Annuitant no later than the Owner/Annuitant’s RBD, or distributions over the life of the Owner/Annuitant (or the Owner/Annuitant and his beneficiary) must begin no later than the RBD.

The RBD for distributions from a Qualified Contract maintained for an IRA under Section 408 of the Code is generally April 1 of the calendar year following the year in which the Owner/Annuitant reaches age 701/2. The RBD for a Qualified Contract maintained for a qualified retirement or pension plan under Section 401 of the Code is April 1 of the calendar year following the later of the year in which the Owner/Annuitant reaches age 701/2, or, if the plan so provides, the year in which the Owner/Annuitant retires. There is no RBD for a Roth IRA maintained pursuant to Section 408A of the Code.

The IRS issued Final and Temporary Regulations on April 17, 2002 (“Final Regulations”). Effective January 1, 2003, the IRS requires that all IRA holders and Qualified Plan Participants (with one exception discussed below) use the Uniform Lifetime Table to calculate their RMDs.

The Uniform Lifetime Table is based on a joint life expectancy and uses the IRA owner’s actual age and assumes that the beneficiary is 10 years younger than the IRA owner. Note that under these Final Regulations, the IRA owner does not need to actually have a named beneficiary when they turn age 701/2.

The exception noted above is for an IRA owner who has a spouse, who is more than 10 years younger, as the sole beneficiary on the IRA. In that situation, the spouse’s actual age (and life expectancy) will be used in the joint life calculation.

If the Owner/Annuitant dies prior to his RBD or complete distribution from the Qualified Contract, the remainder shall be distributed as provided in the “Qualified Contract Distribution Rules” section of this Prospectus. For non-spouse beneficiaries, life expectancy is initially computed by use of the Single Life Table of the Final Regulations (Regulation Section 1.401(a)(9)-9). Subsequent life expectancy shall be calculated by reducing the life expectancy of the Beneficiary by one in each following calendar year.

The method of distribution selected must comply with the minimum distribution rules of Code Section 401(a)(9), and the applicable Regulations thereunder.

Actuarial Value

In accordance with recent changes in laws and regulations, RMDs and Roth IRA conversions may be calculated based on the sum of the contract value and the actuarial value of any additional death benefits and benefits from optional riders that you have purchased under the Contract. As a result, RMDs and taxes due on Roth IRA Conversions may be larger than if the calculation were based on the contract value only, which may in turn result in an earlier (but not before the required beginning date) distribution under the Contract and an increased amount of taxable income distributed to the contract owner, and a reduction of death benefits and the benefits of any optional riders.

RMDs and Annuity Options

Under the Final Regulations, for retirement plans that qualify under Section 401 or 408 of the Code, the period elected for receipt of RMDs as annuity payments under Annuity Options 2 and 4 generally may be:


	•	no longer than the joint life expectancy of the Annuitant and Beneficiary in the year that the Annuitant reaches age 701/2, and

	•	must be shorter than such joint life expectancy if the Beneficiary is not the Annuitant’s spouse and is more than 10 years younger than the Annuitant.

Under Annuity Option 3, if the Beneficiary is not the Annuitant’s spouse and is more than 10 years younger than the Annuitant, the 662/3% and 100% elections specified below may not be available.

IRAs and Qualified Plans

The following is only a general discussion about types of IRAs and Qualified Plans for which the Contracts are available. We are not the administrator of any Qualified Plan. The plan administrator and/or custodian, whichever is applicable, (but not us) is responsible for all Plan administrative duties including, but not limited to, notification of distribution options, disbursement of Plan benefits, compliance regulatory requirements and federal and state tax reporting of income/distributions from the Plan to Plan participants and, if applicable, Beneficiaries of Plan participants and IRA contributions from Plan participants. Our administrative duties are limited to administration of the Contract and any disbursements of any Contract benefits to the Owner, Annuitant, or Beneficiary of the Contract, as applicable. Our tax reporting responsibility is limited to federal and state tax reporting of income/distributions to the applicable payee and IRA contributions from the Owner of a Contract, as recorded on our books and records. The Qualified Plan (the plan administrator or the custodian) is required to provide us with information regarding individuals with signatory authority on the Contract(s) owned. If you are purchasing a Qualified Contract, you should consult with your plan administrator and/or a qualified tax adviser. You should also consult with a qualified tax adviser and/or plan administrator before you withdraw any portion of your Contract Value.

Individual Retirement Annuities (“IRAs”)

In addition to “traditional” IRAs established under Code 408, there are SEP IRAs under Code Section 408(k), Roth IRAs governed by Code Section 408A and SIMPLE IRAs established under Code Section 408(p). Also, Qualified Plans under Section 401 or 457(b) of the Code that include after-tax employee contributions may be treated as deemed IRAs subject to the same rules and limitations as traditional IRAs. Contributions to each of these types of IRAs are subject to differing limitations. The following is a very general description of each type of IRA and other Qualified Plans.

Traditional IRAs

Traditional IRAs are subject to limitations on the amount that may be contributed each year, the persons who may be eligible to contribute, when rollovers are available and when distributions must commence. Depending upon the circumstances of the individual, contributions to a traditional IRA may be made on a deductible or non-deductible basis.

Annual contributions are generally allowed for persons who have not attained age 701/2 and who have compensation (as defined by the IRS) of at least the contribution amount. Distributions of minimum amounts specified by the Code must commence by April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which you attain age 701/2. Failure to make mandatory minimum distributions may result in imposition of a 50% tax penalty on any difference between the required distribution amount and the amount actually distributed. Additional distribution rules apply after your death.

You (or your surviving spouse if you die) may rollover funds (such as proceeds from existing insurance policies, annuity contracts or securities) from certain existing Qualified Plans into your traditional IRA if those funds are in cash. This will require you to liquidate any value accumulated under the existing Qualified Plan. Mandatory withholding of 20% may apply to any rollover distribution from your

existing Qualified Plan if the distribution is not transferred directly to your traditional IRA. To avoid this withholding you should have cash transferred directly from the insurance company or plan trustee to your traditional IRA.

SIMPLE IRAs

The Savings Incentive Match Plan for Employees of Small Employers (“SIMPLE Plan”) is a type of IRA established under Code Section 408(p)(2). Depending upon the SIMPLE Plan, employers may make plan contributions into a SIMPLE IRA established by each participant of the SIMPLE Plan. Like other IRAs, a 10% tax penalty is imposed on certain distributions that occur before an employee attains age 591/2. In addition, the tax penalty is increased to 25% for amounts received or rolled to another IRA or Qualified Plan during the 2-year period beginning on the date an employee first participated in a qualified salary reduction arrangement pursuant to a SIMPLE Plan maintained by their employer. Contributions to a SIMPLE IRA will generally include employee salary deferral contributions and employer contributions. Distributions from a SIMPLE IRA may be transferred to another SIMPLE IRA tax free or may be eligible for tax free rollover to a traditional IRA, a 457(b) or other Qualified Plan after the required 2-year period.

SEP-IRAs

A Simplified Employee Pension (SEP) is an employer sponsored retirement plan under which employers are allowed to make contributions toward their employees’ retirement, as well as their own retirement (if the employer is self-employed). A SEP is a type of IRA established under Code Section 408(k). Under a SEP, a separate IRA account called a SEP-IRA is set up by or for each eligible employee and the employer makes the contribution to the account. Like other IRAs, a 10% tax penalty is imposed on certain distributions that occur before an employee attains age 591/2.

Roth IRAs

Section 408A of the Code permits eligible individuals to establish a Roth IRA. Contributions to a Roth IRA are not deductible, but withdrawals of amounts contributed and the earnings thereon that meet certain requirements are not subject to federal income tax. In general, Roth IRAs are subject to limitations on the amount that may be contributed and the persons who may be eligible to contribute and are subject to certain required distribution rules on the death of the Contract Owner. Unlike a traditional IRA, Roth IRAs are not subject to minimum required distribution rules during the Contract Owner’s lifetime. Generally, however, the amount remaining in a Roth IRA must be distributed by the end of the fifth year after the death of the Contract Owner/Annuitant or distributed over the life expectancy of the Designated Beneficiary. The owner of a traditional IRA may convert a traditional IRA into a Roth IRA under certain circumstances. The conversion of a traditional IRA to a Roth IRA will subject the amount of the converted traditional IRA to federal income tax. Anyone considering the purchase of a Qualified Contract as a Roth IRA or a “conversion” Roth IRA should consult with a qualified tax adviser.

In accordance with recent changes in laws and regulations, at the time of either a full or partial conversion from a Traditional IRA annuity to a Roth IRA annuity, the determination of the amount to be reported as income will be based on the annuity contract’s “fair market value”, which will include all front-end loads and other non-recurring charges assessed in the 12 months immediately preceding the conversion, and the actuarial present value of any additional contract benefits.

Section 457(b) Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation Plans

Certain employees of governmental entities or tax exempt employers may defer compensation through an eligible plan under Code section 457(b). Contributions to a Contract of an eligible plan are subject to limitations. Subject to plan provisions and a qualifying triggering event, assets in a Section 457(b) plan established by a governmental entity may be transferred or rolled into an IRA or another Qualified Plan, if the Qualified Plan allows the transfer or rollover. If a rollover to an IRA is completed, the assets become subject to IRA rules, including the 10% penalty on distributions prior to age 591/2. Assets from other plans may be rolled into a governmental 457(b) plan if the 457(b) plan allows the rollover and if the investment provider is able to segregate the assets for tax reporting purposes. Consult both the distributing plan and the receiving plan prior to making this election. Assets in a 457(b) plan set up by a tax exempt employer may not be rolled to a different type of Qualified Plan or IRA at any time.

401(k) Plans; Pension and Profit-Sharing Plans

Qualified Plans may be established by an employer for certain eligible employees under Section 401 of the Code. These plans may be 401(k) plans, profit-sharing plans, or other pension or retirement plans. Contributions to these plans are subject to limitations. Rollover to other eligible plans may be available. Please consult your Qualified Plans Summary Plan description for more information.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Voting Rights

We are the legal owner of the shares of the Portfolios held by the Subaccounts. We may vote on any matter voted on at shareholders’ meetings of the Funds. However, our current interpretation of applicable law requires us to vote the number of shares attributable to your Variable Account Value (your “voting interest”) in accordance with your directions.

We will pass proxy materials on to you so that you have an opportunity to give us voting instructions for your voting interest. You may provide your instructions by proxy or in person at the shareholders’ meeting. If there are shares of a Portfolio held by a Subaccount for which we do not receive timely voting instructions, we will vote those shares in the same proportion as all other shares of that Portfolio held by that Subaccount for which we have received timely voting instructions. If we do not receive any voting instructions for the shares in a Separate Account, we will vote the shares in that Separate Account in the same proportion as the total votes for all of our separate accounts for which we’ve received timely instructions. If we hold shares of a Portfolio in our General Account, we will vote such shares in the same proportion as the total votes cast for all of our separate accounts, including Separate Account A. We will vote shares of any Portfolio held by our non-insurance affiliates in the same proportion as the total votes for all separate accounts of ours and our insurance affiliates. As a result of proportional voting, the votes cast by a small number of Contract Owners may determine the outcome of a vote.

We may elect, in the future, to vote shares of the Portfolios held in Separate Account A in our own right if we are permitted to do so through a change in applicable federal securities laws or regulations, or in their interpretation.

The number of Portfolio shares that form the basis for your voting interest is determined as of the record date set by the Board of Trustees of the Fund. It is equal to:


	•	your Contract Value allocated to the Subaccount corresponding to that Portfolio, divided by

	•	the net asset value per share of that Portfolio.

Fractional votes will be counted. We reserve the right, if required or permitted by a change in federal regulations or their interpretation, to amend how we calculate your voting interest.

Changes to Your Contract

Contract Owner(s)

Transfer of Contract ownership may involve federal income tax and/or gift tax consequences; you should consult a qualified tax adviser before effecting such a transfer. A change to or from joint Contract ownership is considered a transfer of ownership. If your Contract is Non-Qualified, you may change Contract ownership at any time while the Annuitant is living and prior to your Annuity Date. You may name a different Owner or add or remove a Joint Owner. A Contract cannot name more than two Contract Owners at any time. Any newly-named Contract Owners, including Joint Owners, must be under the age of 91 at the time of change or addition. The Contract Owner(s) may make all decisions regarding the Contract, including making allocation decisions and exercising voting rights. Transactions under a Contract with Joint Owners require approval from both Owners.

If your Contract is Qualified under Code Sections 401 or 457(b), the Qualified Plan must be the sole Owner of the Contract and the ownership cannot be changed unless and until a triggering event has been met under the terms of the Qualified Plan. Upon such event, the ownership can only be changed to the Annuitant. If your Contract is Qualified under Code Section 408, you must be the sole Owner of the Contract and no changes can be made.

Annuitant and Contingent or Joint Annuitant

Your sole Annuitant cannot be changed, and Joint Annuitants cannot be added or changed, once your Contract is issued. Certain changes may be permitted in connection with Contingent Annuitants. See ANNUITIZATION – Selecting Your Annuitant. There may be limited exceptions for certain Qualified Contracts.

Beneficiaries

Your Beneficiary is the person(s) or entity who may receive death benefit proceeds under your Contract or any remaining annuity payments after the Annuity Date if the Annuitant or Owner dies. See the DEATH BENEFITS section for additional information regarding death benefit payouts. You may change or remove your Beneficiary or add Beneficiaries at any time prior to the death of the Annuitant or Owner, as applicable. Any change or addition will generally take effect only when we receive all necessary documents, In Proper Form, and we record the change or addition. Any change or addition will not affect any payment made or any other action taken by us before the change or addition was received and recorded. Under our administrative procedures, a signature guarantee and/or other verification of identity or authenticity may be required when processing a claim payable to a Beneficiary.

Spousal consent may be required to change an IRA Beneficiary. If you are considering removing a spouse as a Beneficiary, it is recommended that you consult your legal or tax advisor regarding any applicable state or federal laws prior to requesting the change. If you have named your Beneficiary irrevocably, you will need to obtain that Beneficiary’s consent before making any changes. Qualified Contracts may have additional restrictions on naming and changing Beneficiaries. If your Contract was issued in connection with a Qualified Plan subject to Title I of ERISA, contact your Plan Administrator for details. We require that Contracts issued under Code Sections 401 and 457(b) name the Plan as Beneficiary. If you leave no surviving Beneficiary or Contingent Beneficiary, your estate will receive any death benefit proceeds under your Contract.

Changes to All Contracts

If, in the judgment of our management, continued investment by Separate Account A in one or more of the Portfolios becomes unsuitable or unavailable, we may seek to alter the Variable Investment Options available under the Contracts. We do not expect that a Portfolio will become unsuitable, but unsuitability issues could arise due to changes in investment policies, market conditions, tax laws, or due to marketing or other reasons.

Alterations of Variable Investment Options may take differing forms. We reserve the right to substitute shares of any Portfolio that were already purchased under any Contract (or shares that were to be purchased in the future under a Contract) with shares of another Portfolio, shares of another investment company or series of another investment company, or another investment vehicle. Required approvals of the SEC and state insurance regulators will be obtained before any such substitutions are effected, and you will be notified of any planned substitution.

We may add new Subaccounts to Separate Account A and any new Subaccounts may invest in Portfolios of a Fund or in other investment vehicles. Availability of any new Subaccounts to existing Contract Owners will be determined at our discretion. We will notify you, and will comply with the filing or other procedures established by applicable state insurance regulators, to the extent required by applicable law. We also reserve the right, after receiving any required regulatory approvals, to do any of the following:

Inquiries and Submitting Forms and Requests

You may reach Pacific Life service representatives at (800) 722-4448 between the hours of 6:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., Pacific time. Schwab Financial Consultants may call us at (800) 610-4823.

Please send your forms and written requests or questions to:

Pacific Life Insurance Company
P.O. Box 2378
Omaha, Nebraska 68103-2378

If you are submitting a Purchase Payment or other payment by mail, please send it, along with your application if you are submitting one, to the following address:

Pacific Life Insurance Company
P.O. Box 2290
Omaha, Nebraska 68103-2290

If you are using an overnight delivery service to send payments, please send them to the following address:

Pacific Life Insurance Company
1299 Farnam Street, 6^th Floor, RSD

Omaha, Nebraska 68102

The effective date of certain notices or of instructions is determined by the date and time on which we receive the notice or instructions In Proper Form. In those instances when we receive electronic transmission of the information on the application from Schwab, we consider the application to be received on the Business Day we receive the transmission. If the address on your Contract specification pages is different and our administrative procedures with Schwab so provide, in those instances when information regarding your Purchase Payment is electronically transmitted to us by Schwab, we will consider the Purchase Payment to be received by us on the Business Day we receive the transmission of the information. Please call us if you or your Schwab Financial Consultant have any questions regarding which address you should use.

We reserve the right to process any Purchase Payment received at an incorrect address when it is received at either the address indicated in your Contract specification pages or the appropriate address indicated in the Prospectus.

Purchase Payments after your initial Purchase Payment, transfer requests and withdrawal requests we receive before the close of the New York Stock Exchange, which usually closes at 4:00 p.m. Eastern time, will normally be effective at the end of the same Business Day that we receive them In Proper Form unless the transaction or event is scheduled to occur on another day. Generally, whenever you submit any other form, notice or request, your instructions will be effective on the next Business Day after we receive them In Proper Form

unless the transaction or event is scheduled to occur on another day. We may also require, among other things, a signature guarantee or other verification of authenticity. We do not generally require a signature guarantee unless it appears that your signature may have changed over time or the signature does not appear to be yours; or an executed application or confirmation of application, as applicable, In Proper Form is not received by us; or, to protect you or us. Requests regarding death benefit proceeds must be accompanied by both proof of death and instructions regarding payment In Proper Form. You should call your Schwab Financial Consultant or us if you have questions regarding the required form of a request.

Telephone and Electronic Transactions

You are automatically entitled to make certain transactions by telephone or, to the extent available, electronically. You may also authorize other people to make certain transaction requests by telephone or, to the extent available, electronically by so indicating on the application or by sending us instructions in writing in a form acceptable to us. We cannot guarantee that you or any other person you authorize will always be able to reach us to complete a telephone or electronic transaction; for example, all telephone lines may be busy or access to our website may be unavailable during certain periods, such as periods of substantial market fluctuations or other drastic economic or market change, or telephones or the Internet may be out of service or unavailable during severe weather conditions or other emergencies. Under these circumstances, you should submit your request in writing (or other form acceptable to us). Transaction instructions we receive by telephone or electronically before the close of the New York Stock Exchange, which usually closes at 4:00 p.m. Eastern time, on any Business Day will usually be effective at the end of that day, and we will provide you confirmation of each telephone or electronic transaction.

We have established procedures reasonably designed to confirm that instructions communicated by telephone or electronically are genuine. These procedures may require any person requesting a telephone or electronic transaction to provide certain personal identification upon our request. We may also record all or part of any telephone conversation with respect to transaction instructions. We reserve the right to deny any transaction request made by telephone or electronically. You are authorizing us to accept and to act upon instructions received by telephone or electronically with respect to your Contract, and you agree that, so long as we comply with our procedures, neither we, any of our affiliates, nor any Fund, or any of their directors, trustees, officers, employees or agents will be liable for any loss, liability, cost or expense (including attorneys’ fees) in connection with requests that we believe to be genuine. This policy means that so long as we comply with our procedures, you will bear the risk of loss arising out of the telephone or electronic transaction privileges of your Contract. If a Contract has Joint Owners, each Owner may individually make telephone and/or electronic transaction requests.

Electronic Information Consent

Subject to availability, you may authorize us to provide prospectuses, prospectus supplements, annual and semi-annual reports, annual statements, quarterly statements and immediate confirmations, proxy solicitation, privacy notice and other notices and documentation in electronic format when available instead of receiving paper copies of these documents by U.S. mail. You may enroll in this service by so indicating on the application, via our Internet website, or by sending us instructions in writing in a form acceptable to us to receive such documents electronically. Not all contract documentation and notifications may be currently available in electronic format. You will continue to receive paper copies of any documents and notifications not available in electronic format by U.S. mail. In addition, you will continue to receive paper copies of annual statements if required by state or federal law. By enrolling in this service, you consent to receive in electronic format any documents added in the future. For jointly owned contracts, both owners are consenting to receive information electronically. Documents will be available on our Internet website. As documents become available, we will notify you of this by sending you an e-mail message that will include instructions on how to retrieve the document. You must have ready access to a computer with Internet access, an active e-mail account to receive this information electronically, and the ability to read and retain it. You may access and print all documents provided through this service.

If you plan on enrolling in this service, or are currently enrolled, please note that:


	•	We impose no additional charge for electronic delivery, although your Internet provider may charge for Internet access.

	•	You must provide a current e-mail address and notify us promptly when your e-mail address changes.

	•	You must update any e-mail filters that may prevent you from receiving e-mail notifications from us.

	•	You may request a paper copy of the information at any time for no charge, even though you consented to electronic delivery, or if you decide to revoke your consent.

	•	For jointly owned contracts, both owners are consenting that the primary owner will receive information electronically. (Only the primary owner will receive e-mail notices.)

	•	Electronic delivery will be cancelled if e-mails are returned undeliverable.

	•	This consent will remain in effect until you revoke it.

We are not required to deliver this information electronically and may discontinue electronic delivery in whole or in part at any time. If you are currently enrolled in this service, please call (800) 722-4448 if you would like to revoke your consent, wish to receive a paper copy of the information above, or need to update your e-mail address.

Timing of Payments and Transactions

For withdrawals, including exchanges under Code Section 1035 and other Qualified transfers, from the Variable Investment Options or for death benefit payments attributable to your Variable Account Value, we will normally send the proceeds within 7 calendar days after your request is effective or after the Notice Date, as the case may be. We will normally effect periodic annuity payments on the day that corresponds to the Annuity Date and will make payment on the following day. Payments or transfers may be suspended for a longer period under certain extraordinary circumstances. These include: a closing of the New York Stock Exchange other than on a regular holiday or weekend; a trading restriction imposed by the SEC; or an emergency declared by the SEC.

Confirmations, Statements and Other Reports to Contract Owners

Confirmations will be sent out for unscheduled Purchase Payments and transfers, unscheduled partial withdrawals, a full withdrawal, optional living benefit rider Automatic Resets, and on payment of any death benefit proceeds. Periodically, we will send you a statement that provides certain information pertinent to your Contract. These statements disclose Contract Value, Subaccount values, fees and charges applied to your Contract Value, transactions made and specific Contract data that apply to your Contract. Confirmations of your transactions under the pre-authorized checking plan, portfolio rebalancing, and pre-authorized withdrawal options will appear on your quarterly account statements. Your fourth-quarter statement will contain annual information about your Contract Value and transactions. You may also access these statements online.

If you suspect an error on a confirmation or quarterly statement, you must notify us in writing as soon as possible to ensure proper accounting to your Contract. When you write, tell us your name, contract number and a description of the suspected error. We assume transactions are accurate unless you notify us otherwise within 30 days of receiving the transaction confirmation or, if the transaction is first confirmed on the quarterly statement, within 30 days of receiving the quarterly statement. All transactions are deemed final and may not be changed after the applicable 30 day period.

You will also be sent an annual report for the Separate Account and the Funds and a list of the securities held in each Portfolio of the Funds, as required by the 1940 Act; or more frequently if required by law.

Contract Owner Mailings. To help reduce expenses, environmental waste and the volume of mail you receive, only one copy of Contract Owner documents (such as the prospectus, supplements, announcements, and each annual and semi-annual report) may be mailed to Contract Owners who share the same household address (Householding). If you are already participating, you may opt out by contacting us. Please allow 30 calendar days for regular delivery to resume. You may also elect to participate in Householding by writing to us. The current documents are available on our website any time or an individual copy of any of these documents may be requested – see the last page of this Prospectus for more information.

Distribution Arrangements

We and PSD, our broker-dealer and subsidiary, entered into a selling agreement with Schwab. The contracts are sold exclusively through Schwab and Schwab is not affiliated with us or PSD. PSD and Schwab are registered as broker-dealers with the SEC and are members of The Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (“FINRA”). Schwab is a subsidiary of The Charles Schwab Corporation and an affiliate of CSIM, the investment adviser for the Schwab VIT Portfolios and the Schwab ETFs including certain ETFs in which the Schwab VIT Portfolios will invest.

PSD pays Schwab compensation for the promotion and sale of the Contracts. The individual Schwab Financial Consultant who sells you a Contract typically will receive a portion of the compensation under the Schwab Financial Consultant’s own arrangement with Schwab. PSD pays Schwab an annual trail commission of 0.20% of the Account Value considered in connection with the trail commission.

Additional Compensation and Revenue Sharing

To the extent permitted by SEC and FINRA rules and other applicable laws and regulations, Schwab may receive additional payments in the form of cash, other special compensation or reimbursement of expenses, sometimes called “revenue sharing”, as mutually agreed to by PSD and Schwab. These additional compensation or reimbursement arrangements may include, for example, payments in connection with the firm’s “due diligence” examination of the contracts, payments for providing conferences or seminars, sales or training programs for invited Schwab Financial Consultants and other employees, payments for travel expenses, including lodging, incurred by Schwab Financial Consultants and other employees for such seminars or training programs, seminars for the public, advertising and sales campaigns regarding the Contracts, and payments to assist a firm in connection with its administrative systems, operations and marketing expenses and/or other events or activities sponsored by the firms. Subject to applicable FINRA rules and other applicable laws and regulations, PSD and its affiliates may contribute to, as well as sponsor, various educational programs, sales contests and/or promotions

in which participating firms and their salespersons may receive prizes such as merchandise, cash, or other awards. Such additional compensation may give us greater access to Schwab Financial Consultants that receive such compensation or may otherwise influence the way that Schwab markets the Contracts.

These arrangements may not be applicable to all firms, and the terms of such arrangements may differ between firms. Any such compensation will not result in any additional direct charge to you by us.

The compensation and other benefits provided by PSD or its affiliates may be more or less than the overall compensation on similar or other products. This may influence your Schwab Financial Consultant or Schwab to present this Contract over other investment vehicles available in the marketplace. You may ask your Schwab Financial Consultant about these differing and divergent interests, how he/she is personally compensated and how Schwab is compensated for soliciting applications for the Contract.

Replacement of Life Insurance or Annuities

The term “replacement” has a special meaning in the life insurance industry and is described more fully below. Before you make your purchase decision, we want you to understand how a replacement may impact your existing plan of insurance.

A policy “replacement” occurs when a new policy or contract is purchased and, in connection with the sale, an existing policy or contract is surrendered, lapsed, forfeited, assigned to the replacing insurer, otherwise terminated, or used in a financed purchase. A “financed purchase” occurs when the purchase of a new life insurance policy or annuity contract involves the use of funds obtained from the values of an existing life insurance policy or annuity contract through withdrawal, surrender or loan.

There are circumstances in which replacing your existing life insurance policy or annuity contract can benefit you. As a general rule, however, replacement is not in your best interest. Accordingly, you should make a careful comparison of the costs and benefits of your existing policy or contract and the proposed policy or contract to determine whether replacement is in your best interest.

State Considerations

For Contracts issued in the state of Pennsylvania, any person who knowingly and with intent to defraud any insurance company or other person files an application for insurance or statement of claim containing any materially false information or conceals for the purpose of misleading, information concerning any fact material thereto commits a fraudulent insurance act, which is a crime and subjects such person to criminal and civil penalties.

In addition, you understand that benefits and values provided under the Contract may be on a variable basis. Amounts directed into one or more variable Investment Options will reflect the investment experience of those Investment Options. These amounts may increase or decrease and are not guaranteed as to a dollar amount.

California Applicants Age 60 or Older

For residents of the state of California 60 years of age or older, the Free Look period is a 30-day period beginning on the day you receive your Contract. If you are a California applicant age 60 or older, you must elect, at the time you apply for your Contract, to receive a return of either your Purchase Payments or your Contract Value proceeds if you exercise your Right to Cancel and return your Contract to us.

If you elect to receive the return of Purchase Payments option, the following will apply:


	•	We will allocate all or any portion of any Purchase Payment designated for any Variable Investment Option to the Cash Management Subaccount until the Free Look Transfer Date. The Free Look Transfer Date is 30 days from the Contract Date. On the Free Look Transfer Date, we will automatically transfer your Cash Management Subaccount Value according to the instructions on your application, or your most recent instruction, if any. This automatic transfer to the Variable Investment Options according to your initial allocation instruction is excluded from the Transfer limitations. See HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED – Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions.

	•	If you specifically instruct us to allocate all or any portion of any additional Purchase Payments we receive to any Variable Investment Option other than the Cash Management Subaccount before the Free Look Transfer Date, you will automatically change your election to the return of your Contract Value proceeds option. This will automatically cancel your election of the “return of Purchase Payments” option for the entire Contract.

	•	If you request a transfer of all or any portion of your Contract Value from the Cash Management Subaccount to any other Variable Investment Option before the Free Look Transfer Date, you will automatically change your election to the return of your Contract


		Value proceeds option. This will automatically cancel your election of the “return of Purchase Payments” option for the entire Contract.


	•	If you exercise your Right to Cancel, we will send you your Purchase Payments.

If you elect the return of Contract Value proceeds option, the following will apply:


	•	We will immediately allocate any Purchase Payments we receive to the Investment Options you select on your application or your most recent instructions, if any.

	•	If you exercise your Right to Cancel, we will send you your Contract Value proceeds described in the Right to Cancel (“Free Look”) section of this prospectus.

	•	Once you elect this option, it may not be changed.

Financial Statements

The statements of assets and liabilities of Separate Account A as of December 31, 2011, the related statements of operations for the periods presented, the statements of changes in net assets for each of the periods presented and the financial highlights for each of the periods presented are incorporated by reference in the Statement of Additional Information from the Annual Report of Separate Account A dated December 31, 2011. Pacific Life’s consolidated statements of financial condition as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, and the related consolidated statements of operations, equity and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2011 are contained in the Statement of Additional Information.

Rule 12h-7 Representation

In reliance on the exemption provided by Rule 12h-7 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (“34 Act”), we do not intend to file periodic reports as required under the 34 Act.

THE GENERAL ACCOUNT

We manage our General Account assets, subject to investment policies, objectives, directions, and guidelines established by our Board. You will not share in the investment experience of General Account assets. Unlike the Separate Account, the General Account is subject to liabilities arising from any of our other business. Any guarantees provided for under the contract or through optional riders are backed by Pacific Life’s financial strength and claims-paying ability. You must look to the strength of the insurance company with regard to such guarantees.

APPENDIX A:

GUARANTEED LIFETIME WITHDRAWAL BENEFIT (SINGLE AND JOINT)

SAMPLE CALCULATIONS

The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. Where Contract Value is reflected, the examples do not assume any specific return percentage. The examples have been provided to assist in understanding the benefits provided by this Rider and to demonstrate how Purchase Payments received and withdrawals made from the Contract prior to the Annuity Date affect the values and benefits under this Rider over an extended period of time. There may be minor differences in the calculations due to rounding. These examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns nor are they a reflection of how your Contract will actually perform.

The examples apply to Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Single) and (Joint) unless otherwise noted below.

Example #1 – Setting of Initial Values.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	Every Owner and Annuitant (every Designated Life for Joint) is 64 years old.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$5,000

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

Example #2 – Subsequent Purchase Payment.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	Every Owner and Annuitant (every Designated Life for Joint) is 64 years old.
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.
	•	No withdrawals taken.
	•	Automatic Reset at Beginning of Contract Year 2.
	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$5,000

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$10,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$10,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$10,350

Immediately after the $100,000 subsequent Purchase Payment during Contract Year 1, the Protected Payment Base is increased by the Purchase Payment amount to $200,000 ($100,000 + $100,000). The Protected Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment is equal to $10,000 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the Purchase Payment).

An automatic reset takes place at Year 2 Contract Anniversary, since the Contract Value ($207,000) is higher than the Protected Payment Base ($200,000). This resets the Protected Payment Base to $207,000 and the Protected Payment Amount to $10,350 (5% × $207,000).

In addition to Purchase Payments, the Contract Value is further subject to increases and/or decreases during each Contract Year as a result of charges, fees and other deductions, and increases and/or decreases in the investment performance of the Variable Account.

Example #3 – Withdrawal Not Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	Every Owner and Annuitant (every Designated Life for Joint) is 64 years old.
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.
	•	A withdrawal lower than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.
	•	Contract Value immediately before withdrawal = $221,490.
	•	Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2 and 3.
	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$5,000

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$10,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$10,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$10,350

Activity		$5,000	$216,490 (after $5,000 withdrawal)	$207,000	$5,350

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$216,490	$207,000	$10,350

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$216,490	$216,490	$10,825

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

An automatic reset takes place at Year 2 Contract Anniversary, since the Contract Value ($207,000) is higher than the Protected Payment Base ($200,000). This reset increases the Protected Payment Base to $207,000 and the Protected Payment Amount to $10,350 (5% × $207,000).

Because the $5,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 did not exceed the $10,350 Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged.

At Year 3 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary (see balances at Year 3 Contract Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an automatic reset occurs which increases the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see balances at Year 3 Contract Anniversary – After Automatic Reset). As a result, the Protected Payment Amount after the automatic reset at the Year 3 Contract Anniversary is equal to $10,825 (5% of the reset Protected Payment Base).

Example #4 – Withdrawal Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	Every Owner and Annuitant (every Designated Life for Joint) is 64 years old.
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.
	•	A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.
	•	Contract Value immediately before withdrawal = $195,000.
	•	Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2 and 3.


	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$5,000

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$10,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$10,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$10,350

Activity		$30,000	$165,000 (after $30,000 withdrawal)	$184,975	$0

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$192,000	$184,975	$9,249

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$192,000	$192,000	$9,600

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

Because the $30,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 exceeds the $10,350 Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base immediately after the withdrawal will be reduced based on the following calculation:

First, determine the excess withdrawal amount, which is the total withdrawal amount less the Protected Payment Amount: $30,000 − $10,350 = $19,650.

Second, determine the reduction percentage by dividing the excess withdrawal amount computed above by the difference between the Contract Value and the Protected Payment Amount immediately before the withdrawal: $19,650 ¸ ($195,000 − $10,350) = 0.1064 or 10.64%.

Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base by reducing the Protected Payment Base immediately prior to the withdrawal by the percentage computed above: $207,000 − ($207,000 × 10.64%) = $184,975.

The Protected Payment Amount immediately after the withdrawal is equal to $0. This amount is determined by multiplying the Protected Payment Base before the withdrawal by 5% and then subtracting all of the withdrawals made during that Contract Year: (5% × $207,000) − $30,000 = -$19,650 or $0, since the Protected Payment Amount can’t be less than zero.

At Year 3 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary, an automatic reset occurs that increases the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value on that date. (Compare the balances at Year 3 Contract Anniversary Prior to and After Automatic Reset).

Example #5 – Early Withdrawal.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	Every Owner and Annuitant (youngest Designated Life for Joint) is 561/2 years old.
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.
	•	A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.
	•	Contract Value immediately before withdrawal = $221,490.
	•	Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2, 3 and 4.
	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$0

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$0

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$0

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$0

Activity		$25,000	$196,490 (after $25,000 withdrawal)	$182,000	$0

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$196,490	$182,000	$0

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$196,490	$196,490	$0

Year 4 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$205,000	$196,490	$0

Year 4 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$205,000	$205,000	$10,250

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

Because the $25,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 exceeds the $0 Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base immediately after the withdrawal will be reduced based on the following calculation:

First, determine the early withdrawal amount. The early withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount of $25,000.

Second, determine the reduction percentage by dividing the early withdrawal amount determined by the Contract Value prior to the withdrawal: $25,000 ¸ $221,490 = 0.1129 or 11.29%.

Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base by reducing the Protected Payment Base immediately prior to the withdrawal by the greater of (a) the total withdrawal amount ($25,000) and (b) the reduction percentage ($207,000 × 11.29%) = $23,370. Since $25,000 is greater than $23,370, the new Protected Payment Base is computed by subtracting $25,000 from the prior Protected Payment Base: $207,000 − $25,000 = $182,000.

At Year 3 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary, an Automatic Reset occurs which increases the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (compare balances at Year 3 Contract Anniversary – Prior to and After Automatic Reset). The Protected Payment Amount remains at $0 since the oldest Owner (youngest Annuitant for Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut; youngest Designated Life for Joint) has not reached age 591/2.

At Year 4 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary, an Automatic Reset occurs which increases the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (compare balances at Year 4 Contract Anniversary – Prior to and After Automatic Reset). The Protected Payment Amount is set to $10,250 (5% × $205,000) since the oldest Owner (youngest Annuitant for Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut; youngest Designated Life for Joint) reached age 591/2.

Example #6 – RMD Withdrawals.

This is an example of the effect of cumulative RMD Withdrawals during the Contract Year that exceed the Protected Payment Amount established for that Contract Year and its effect on the Protected Payment Base. The Annual RMD Amount is based on the entire interest of your Contract as of the previous year-end.

This table assumes quarterly withdrawals of only the Annual RMD Amount during the Contract Year. The calculated Annual RMD amount for the Calendar Year is $7,500 and the Contract Anniversary is May 1 of each year.



			Annual	Protected	Protected
Activity	RMD	Non-RMD	RMD	Payment	Payment
Date	Withdrawal	Withdrawal	Amount	Base	Amount


05/01/2006				$100,000	$5,000
Contract Anniversary

01/01/2007			$7,500

03/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$3,125

05/01/2007				$100,000	$5,000
Contract Anniversary

06/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$3,125

09/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$1,250

12/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$0

01/01/2008			$8,000

03/15/2008	$2,000			$100,000	$0

05/01/2008				$100,000	$5,000
Contract Anniversary

Since the RMD Amount for 2008 increases to $8,000, the quarterly withdrawals of the RMD Amount increase to $2,000, as shown by the RMD Withdrawal on March 15, 2008. Because all withdrawals during the Contract Year were RMD Withdrawals, there is no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base for exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. In addition, each contract year the Protected Payment Amount is reduced by the amount of each withdrawal until the Protected Payment Amount is zero.

This chart assumes quarterly withdrawals of the Annual RMD Amount and other non-RMD Withdrawals during the Contract Year. The calculated Annual RMD amount and Contract Anniversary are the same as above.



			Annual	Protected	Protected
Activity	RMD	Non-RMD	RMD	Payment	Payment
Date	Withdrawal	Withdrawal	Amount	Base	Amount


05/01/2006			$0	$100,000	$5,000
Contract Anniversary

01/01/2007			$7,500

03/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$3,125

04/01/2007		$2,000		$100,000	$1,125

05/01/2007				$100,000	$5,000
Contract Anniversary

06/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$3,125

09/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$1,250

11/15/2007		$4,000		$96,900	$0

On 3/15/07 there was an RMD Withdrawal of $1,875 and on 4/1/07 a non-RMD Withdrawal of $2,000. Because the total withdrawals during the Contract Year (5/1/06 through 4/30/07) did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount of $5,000 there was no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base. On 5/1/07, the Protected Payment Amount was re-calculated (5% of the Protected Payment Base) as of that Contract Anniversary.

On 11/15/07, there was a non-RMD Withdrawal ($4,000) that caused the cumulative withdrawals during the Contract Year ($7,750) to exceed the Protected Payment Amount ($5,000). As the withdrawal exceeded the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($1,250), and assuming the Contract Value was $90,000 immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base is reduced to $96,900.

The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions immediately before the excess withdrawal:


	•	Contract Value = $90,000
	•	Protected Payment Base = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = $1,250

A withdrawal of $4,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected Payment Amount of $1,250. The Protected Payment Base will be reduced based on the following calculation:

First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal amount is $2,750 (total withdrawal amount − Protected Payment Amount; $4,000 − $1,250 = $2,750).

Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount); the calculation is based on the Contract Value and the Protected Payment Amount values immediately before the excess withdrawal. Numerically, the ratio is 3.10% ($2,750 ¸ ($90,000 − $1,250); $2,750 ¸ $88,750 = 0.0310 or 3.10%).

Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is $96,900 (Protected Payment Base × (1 − ratio); $100,000 × (1 − 3.10%); $100,000 × 96.90% = $96,900).

Example #7 – Lifetime Income.

This example applies to Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Single) only.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	Every Owner and Annuitant is 64 years old.
	•	No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
	•	Withdrawals, each equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base are taken each Contract Year.
	•	No Automatic Reset is assumed during the life of the Rider.
	•	Death occurred during Contract Year 26 after the $5,000 withdrawal was made.



			Protected	Protected
Contract		End of Year	Payment	Payment
Year	Withdrawal	Contract Value	Base	Amount


1	$5,000	$96,489	$100,000	$5,000

2	$5,000	$92,410	$100,000	$5,000

3	$5,000	$88,543	$100,000	$5,000

4	$5,000	$84,627	$100,000	$5,000

5	$5,000	$80,662	$100,000	$5,000

6	$5,000	$76,648	$100,000	$5,000

7	$5,000	$72,583	$100,000	$5,000

8	$5,000	$68,467	$100,000	$5,000

9	$5,000	$64,299	$100,000	$5,000

10	$5,000	$60,078	$100,000	$5,000

11	$5,000	$55,805	$100,000	$5,000

12	$5,000	$51,478	$100,000	$5,000

13	$5,000	$47,096	$100,000	$5,000

14	$5,000	$42,660	$100,000	$5,000

15	$5,000	$38,168	$100,000	$5,000

16	$5,000	$33,619	$100,000	$5,000

17	$5,000	$29,013	$100,000	$5,000

18	$5,000	$24,349	$100,000	$5,000

19	$5,000	$19,626	$100,000	$5,000

20	$5,000	$14,844	$100,000	$5,000

21	$5,000	$10,002	$100,000	$5,000

22	$5,000	$5,099	$100,000	$5,000

23	$5,000	$0	$100,000	$5,000

24	$5,000	$0	$100,000	$5,000

25	$5,000	$0	$100,000	$5,000

26	$5,000	$0	$100,000	$5,000

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($5,000), the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged.

Withdrawals of 5% of the Protected Payment Base will continue to be paid each year (even after the Contract Value has been reduced to zero) until the date of death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant (death of any Annuitant for Non-Natural Owners), whichever occurs first.

Example #8 – Lifetime Income.

This example applies to Guaranteed Lifetime Withdrawal Benefit (Joint) only.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	All Designated Lives are 64 years old.
	•	No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
	•	Withdrawals, each equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base are taken each Contract Year.
	•	No Automatic Reset is assumed during the life of the Rider.
	•	All Designated Lives remain eligible for lifetime income benefits while the Rider is in effect.
	•	Surviving Spouse continues Contract upon the death of the first Designated Life.
	•	Surviving Spouse dies during Contract Year 26 after the $5,000 withdrawal was made.



			Protected	Protected
Contract		End of Year	Payment	Payment
Year	Withdrawal	Contract Value	Base	Amount


1	$5,000	$96,489	$100,000	$5,000

2	$5,000	$92,410	$100,000	$5,000

3	$5,000	$88,543	$100,000	$5,000

4	$5,000	$84,627	$100,000	$5,000

5	$5,000	$80,662	$100,000	$5,000

6	$5,000	$76,648	$100,000	$5,000

7	$5,000	$72,583	$100,000	$5,000

8	$5,000	$68,467	$100,000	$5,000

9	$5,000	$64,299	$100,000	$5,000

10	$5,000	$60,078	$100,000	$5,000

11	$5,000	$55,805	$100,000	$5,000

12	$5,000	$51,478	$100,000	$5,000

13	$5,000	$47,096	$100,000	$5,000

Activity (Death of first Designated Life) 14	$5,000	$42,660	$100,000	$5,000

15	$5,000	$38,168	$100,000	$5,000

16	$5,000	$33,619	$100,000	$5,000

17	$5,000	$29,013	$100,000	$5,000

18	$5,000	$24,349	$100,000	$5,000

19	$5,000	$19,626	$100,000	$5,000

20	$5,000	$14,844	$100,000	$5,000

21	$5,000	$10,002	$100,000	$5,000

22	$5,000	$5,099	$100,000	$5,000

23	$5,000	$0	$100,000	$5,000

24	$5,000	$0	$100,000	$5,000

25	$5,000	$0	$100,000	$5,000

26	$5,000	$0	$100,000	$5,000

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($5,000), the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged.

During Contract Year 13, the death of the first Designated Life occurred. Withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount (5% of the Protected Payment Base) will continue to be paid each year (even after the Contract Value was reduced to zero) until the Rider terminates.

If there was a change in Owner, Beneficiary or marital status prior to the death of the first Designated Life that resulted in the surviving Designated Life (spouse) to become ineligible for lifetime income benefits, then the lifetime income benefits under the Rider would not continue for the surviving Designated Life and the Rider would terminate upon the death of the first Designated Life.


SCHWAB RETIREMENT INCOME VARIABLE ANNUITY		WHERE TO GO FOR MORE INFORMATION


The Schwab Retirement Income Variable Annuity Contract is offered by Pacific Life Insurance Company, 700 Newport Center Drive. P.O. Box 9000, Newport Beach, California 92660. If you have any questions about the Contract, please ask your Schwab Financial Consultant or contact us.		You will find more information about the Schwab Retirement Income Variable Annuity contract and Separate Account A in the Statement of Additional Information (SAI) dated May 1, 2012. The SAI has been filed with the SEC and is considered to be part of this Prospectus because it is incorporated by reference. In this Prospectus, you will find the table of contents for the SAI on page 50. You can get a copy of the SAI at no charge by visiting our website, calling or writing to us, or by contacting the SEC. The SEC may charge you a fee for this information.


How to Contact Pacific Life		Call or write to us at: Pacific Life Insurance Company P.O. Box 2378 Omaha, Nebraska 68103-2378 Contract Owners: (800) 722-4448 Schwab Financial Consultants: (800) 610-4823 6 a.m. through 5 p.m. Pacific time Send Purchase Payments, other payments and application forms to the following address: By mail Pacific Life Insurance Company P.O. Box 2290 Omaha, Nebraska 68103-2290 By overnight delivery service Pacific Life Insurance Company 1299 Farnam Street, 6^th Floor, RSD Omaha, Nebraska 68102


How to Contact Schwab		Contact your Schwab Financial Consultant or call a Schwab Annuity Specialist at (888) 311-4887, weekdays 6 a.m. through 4:30 p.m. Pacific time.


How to Contact the SEC		Commission’s Public Reference Section 100 F Street, NE Washington, D.C. 20549 (202) 551-8090 Website: www.sec.gov e-mail: publicinfo@sec.gov


FINRA Public Disclosure Program		The Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (FINRA) provides investor protection education through its website and printed materials. The FINRA regulation website address is www.finra.org. An investor brochure that includes information describing the BrokerCheck program may be obtained from FINRA. The FINRA BrokerCheck hotline number is (800) 289-9999. FINRA does not charge a fee for the BrokerCheck program services.

PERFORMANCE

From time to time, our reports or other communications to current or prospective Contract Owners or our advertising or other promotional material may quote the performance (yield and total return) of a Subaccount. Quoted results are based on past performance and reflect the performance of all assets held in that Subaccount for the stated time period. Quoted results are neither an estimate nor a guarantee of future investment performance, and do not represent the actual experience of amounts invested by any particular Contract Owner.

Total Returns

A Subaccount may advertise its “average annual total return” over various periods of time. “Total return” represents the average percentage change in value of an investment in the Subaccount from the beginning of a measuring period to the end of that measuring period. “Annualized” total return assumes that the total return achieved for the measuring period is achieved for each full year period. “Average annual” total return is computed in accordance with a standard method prescribed by the SEC, and is also referred to as “standardized return.”

Average Annual Total Return

To calculate a Subaccount’s average annual total return for a specific measuring period, we first take a hypothetical $1,000 investment in that Subaccount, at its applicable Subaccount Unit Value (the “initial payment”) and we compute the ending redeemable value of that initial payment at the end of the measuring period based on the investment experience of that Subaccount (“full withdrawal value”). The full withdrawal value reflects the effect of all recurring fees and charges applicable to a Contract Owner under the Contract, including the Risk Charge, and the asset-based Administrative Fee, but does not reflect any charges for applicable premium taxes and/or any other taxes, any non-recurring fees or charges, or any optional Rider charge. The redeemable value is then divided by the initial payment and this quotient is raised to the 365/N power (N represents the number of days in the measuring period), and 1 is subtracted from this result. Average annual total return is expressed as a percentage.

T = (ERV/P)^(365/N) − 1


where	T	=	average annual total return
	ERV	=	ending redeemable value
	P	=	hypothetical initial payment of $1,000
	N	=	number of days

Average annual total return figures will be given for recent 1-, 3-, 5- and 10-year periods (if applicable), and may be given for other periods as well (such as from commencement of the Subaccount’s operations, or on a year-by-year basis).

When considering “average” total return figures for periods longer than one year, it is important to note that the relevant Subaccount’s annual total return for any one year in the period might have been greater or less than the average for the entire period.

Aggregate Total Return

A Subaccount may use “aggregate” total return figures along with its “average annual” total return figures for various periods; these figures represent the cumulative change in value of an investment in the Subaccount for a specific period. Aggregate total returns may be shown by means of schedules, charts or graphs and may indicate subtotals of the various components of total return. The SEC has not prescribed standard formulas for calculating aggregate total return.

Non-Standardized Total Returns

We may also calculate non-standardized total returns which may or may not reflect any charges for premium taxes and/or any other taxes, any optional Rider charge, or any non-recurring fees or charges.

Standardized return figures will always accompany any non-standardized returns shown.

Yields

Cash Management Subaccount

The “yield” (also called “current yield”) of the Cash Management Subaccount is computed in accordance with a standard method prescribed by the SEC. The net change in the Subaccount’s Unit Value during a seven-day period is divided by the Unit Value at the beginning of the period to obtain a base rate of return. The current yield is generated when the base rate is “annualized” by multiplying it by the fraction 365/7; that is, the base rate of return is assumed to be generated each week over a 365-day period and is shown as a percentage of the investment. The “effective yield” of the Cash Management Subaccount is calculated similarly but, when annualized, the base rate of return is assumed to be reinvested. The effective yield will be slightly higher than the current yield because of the compounding effect of this assumed reinvestment.

The formula for effective yield is: [(Base Period Return + 1) (To the power of 365/7)] − 1.

Realized capital gains or losses and unrealized appreciation or depreciation of the assets of the underlying Cash Management Portfolio are not included in the yield calculation. Current yield and effective yield do not reflect any deduction of charges for any applicable premium taxes and/or any other taxes, any optional Rider charge, but do reflect a deduction for the Risk Charge and the asset-based Administrative Fee.

Other Subaccounts

“Yield” of the other Subaccounts is computed in accordance with a different standard method prescribed by the SEC. The net investment income (investment income less expenses) per Subaccount Unit earned during a specified one-month or 30-day period is divided by the Subaccount Unit Value on the last day of the specified period. This result is then annualized (that is, the yield is assumed to be generated each month or each 30-day period for a year), according to the following formula, which assumes semi-annual compounding:


YIELD = 2*[(		a – b c*d		+ 1)⁶ − 1]


where:	a	=	net investment income earned during the period by the Portfolio attributable to the Subaccount.
	b	=	expenses accrued for the period (net of reimbursements).
	c	=	the average daily number of Subaccount Units outstanding during the period that were entitled to receive dividends.
	d	=	the Unit Value of the Subaccount Units on the last day of the period.

The yield of each Subaccount reflects the deduction of all recurring fees and charges applicable to the Subaccount, such as the Risk Charge, and the asset-based Administrative Fee, but does not reflect any charge for applicable premium taxes and/or any other taxes, any optional Rider charge, or any non-recurring fees or charges.

The Subaccounts’ yields will vary from time to time depending upon market conditions, the composition of each Portfolio and operating expenses of the Fund allocated to each Portfolio. Consequently, any given performance quotation should not be considered representative of the Subaccount’s performance in the future. Yield should also be considered relative to changes in Subaccount Unit Values and to the relative risks associated with the investment policies and objectives of the various Portfolios. In addition, because performance will fluctuate, it may not provide a basis for comparing the yield of a Subaccount with certain bank deposits or other investments that pay a fixed yield or return for a stated period of time.

Performance Comparisons and Benchmarks

In advertisements and sales literature, we may compare the performance of some or all of the Subaccounts to the performance of other variable annuity issuers in general and to the performance of particular types of variable annuities investing in mutual funds, or series of mutual funds, with investment objectives similar to each of the Subaccounts. This performance may be presented as averages or rankings compiled by Lipper Analytical Services, Inc. (“Lipper”), or Morningstar, Inc. (“Morningstar”), which are independent services that monitor and rank the performance of variable annuity issuers and mutual funds in each of the major categories of investment objectives on an industry-wide basis. Lipper’s rankings include variable life issuers as well as variable annuity issuers. The performance analyses prepared by Lipper and Morningstar rank such issuers on the basis of total return, assuming reinvestment of dividends

and distributions, but do not take sales charges, redemption fees or certain expense deductions at the separate account level into consideration. In addition, Morningstar prepares risk adjusted rankings, which consider the effects of market risk on total return performance. We may also compare the performance of the Subaccounts with performance information included in other publications and services that monitor the performance of insurance company separate accounts or other investment vehicles. These other services or publications may be general interest business publications such as The Wall Street Journal, Barron’s, Business Week, Forbes, Fortune, and Money.

In addition, our reports and communications to Contract Owners, advertisements, or sales literature may compare a Subaccount’s performance to various benchmarks that measure the performance of a pertinent group of securities widely regarded by investors as being representative of the securities markets in general or as being representative of a particular type of security. We may also compare the performance of the Subaccounts with that of other appropriate indices of investment securities and averages for peer universes of funds or data developed by us derived from such indices or averages. Unmanaged indices generally assume the reinvestment of dividends or interest but do not generally reflect deductions for investment management or administrative costs and expenses.

Tax Deferred Accumulation

In reports or other communications to you or in advertising or sales materials, we may also describe the effects of tax-deferred compounding on the Separate Account’s investment returns or upon returns in general. These effects may be illustrated in charts or graphs and may include comparisons at various points in time of returns under the Contract or in general on a tax-deferred basis with the returns on a taxable basis. Different tax rates may be assumed.

In general, individuals who own annuity contracts are not taxed on increases in the value under the annuity contract until some form of distribution is made from the contract (Non-Natural Persons as Owners may not receive tax deferred accumulation). Thus, the annuity contract will benefit from tax deferral during the accumulation period, which generally will have the effect of permitting an investment in an annuity contract to grow more rapidly than a comparable investment under which increases in value are taxed on a current basis. The following chart illustrates this benefit by comparing accumulation under a variable annuity contract with accumulations from an investment on which gains are taxed on a current ordinary income basis.

The chart shows a single Purchase Payment of $10,000, assuming hypothetical annual returns of 0%, 4% and 8%, compounded annually, and a tax rate of 33%. The values shown for the taxable investment do not include any deduction for management fees or other expenses but assume that taxes are deducted annually from investment returns. The values shown for the variable annuity do not reflect the deduction of contractual expenses such as the Risk Charge (equal to an annual rate of 0.35% of average daily Account Value), the Administrative Fee (equal to an annual rate of 0.25% of average daily Account Value), other optional Riders charges (equal to a maximum annual rate of 1.75% of the Protected Payment Base) a charge for premium taxes and/or any other taxes or any underlying Fund expenses. The chart assumes a full withdrawal, at the end of the period shown, of all Contract Value and the payment of taxes at the 33% rate on the amount in excess of the Purchase Payment.

The rates of return illustrated are hypothetical and are not an estimate or guarantee of performance. Actual tax rates may vary for different assets (e.g. capital gains and qualifying dividend income) and taxpayers from that illustrated. Withdrawals by and distributions to Contract Owners who have not reached age 591/2 may be subject to a tax penalty of 10%.

Power of Tax Deferral

$10,000 investment at annual rates of return of 0%, 4% and 8%, taxed @ 33%

DISTRIBUTION OF THE CONTRACTS

Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD)

Pacific Select Distributors, Inc., our subsidiary, acts as the distributor of the Contracts and offers the Contracts on a continuous basis. PSD is located at 700 Newport Center Drive, Newport Beach, California 92660. PSD is registered as a broker-dealer with the SEC and is a member of FINRA. We pay PSD for acting as distributor under a Distribution Agreement. We and PSD entered into a selling agreement with Charles Schwab & Co., Inc. (“Schwab”) whose Schwab Financial Consultants are authorized by state insurance departments to solicit applications for the Contracts. Because the Contract was not offered before 2012, PSD was not paid any underwriting commissions with regard to this Contract.

PSD or an affiliate pays Schwab compensation for the promotion and sale of the Contracts. PSD or an affiliate also may provide reimbursement for other expenses associated with the promotion and solicitation of applications for the Contracts. Your Schwab Financial Consultant typically receives a portion of the compensation that is payable to Schwab in connection with the Contract, depending on the arrangement between your Schwab Financial Consultant and Schwab. We are not involved in determining that compensation arrangement, which may present its own incentives or conflicts. You may ask your Schwab Financial Consultant how he/she will personally be compensated for the transaction.

PSD Pays Schwab an annual trail commission of 0.20% of the Account Value considered in connection with the trail commission.

We and/or an affiliate may pay additional cash compensation from our own resources in connection with the promotion and solicitation of applications for the Contracts. This additional compensation also may afford us a “preferred” status at Schwab and provide some other marketing benefit such as website placement, access to Schwab Financial Consultant lists, extra marketing assistance or other heightened visibility and access that otherwise influences the way that Schwab markets the Contracts.

We or our affiliates may also pay override payments, expense allowances and reimbursements, bonuses, wholesaler fees, and training and marketing allowances. Such payments may offset Schwab’s expenses in connection with activities that it is required to perform, such as educating personnel and maintaining records. Schwab Financial Consultants may also receive non-cash compensation, such as expense-paid educational or training seminars involving travel within and outside the U.S. or promotional merchandise.

Portfolio Managers of the underlying Portfolios available under this Contract may from time to time bear all or a portion of the expenses of conferences or meetings sponsored by Pacific Life or PSD that are attended by, among others, representatives of PSD, who would receive information and/or training regarding the Fund’s Portfolios and their management by the Portfolio Managers in addition to information regarding the variable annuity and/or life insurance products issued by Pacific Life and its affiliates. Other persons may also attend all or a portion of any such conferences or meetings, including directors, officers and employees of Pacific Life, officers and trustees of Pacific Select Fund, and spouses/guests of the foregoing. The Pacific Select Fund Board of Trustees may hold meetings concurrently with such a conference or meeting. The Pacific Select Fund pays for the expenses of the meetings of its Board of Trustees, including the pro rata share of expenses for attendance by the Trustees at the concurrent conferences or meetings sponsored by Pacific Life or PSD. Additional expenses and promotional items may be paid for by Pacific Life and/or Portfolio Managers. PSD serves as the Pacific Select Fund Distributor.

THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT

Calculating Subaccount Unit Values

The Unit Value of the Subaccount Units in each Variable Investment Option is computed at the close of the New York Stock Exchange, which is usually 4:00 p.m. Eastern time on each Business Day. The initial Unit Value of each Subaccount was $10 on the Business Day the Subaccount began operations. At the end of each Business Day, the Unit Value for a Subaccount is equal to:

Y × Z


where	(Y)	=	the Unit Value for that Subaccount as of the end of the preceding Business Day; and
	(Z)	=	the Net Investment Factor for that Subaccount for the period (a “valuation period”) between that Business Day and the immediately preceding Business Day.

The “Net Investment Factor” for a Subaccount for any valuation period is equal to:

(A ¸ B) − C


where		(A)		=		the “per share value of the assets” of that Subaccount as of the end of that valuation period, which is equal to: a+b+c


where	(a)	=	the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio shares held by that Subaccount as of the end of that valuation period;
	(b)	=	the per share amount of any dividend or capital gain distributions made by the Fund for that Portfolio during that valuation period; and
	(c)	=	any per share charge (a negative number) or credit (a positive number) for any income taxes or other amounts set aside during that valuation period as a reserve for any income and/or any other taxes which we determine to have resulted from the operations of the Subaccount or Contract, and/or any taxes attributable, directly or indirectly, to Investments;


(B)	=	the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio shares held by the Subaccount as of the end of the preceding valuation period; and
(C)	=	a factor that assesses against the Subaccount net assets for each calendar day in the valuation period, the basic Risk Charge plus the Administrative Fee and any applicable increase in the Risk Charge (see the CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS section in the Prospectus).

Corresponding Dates

If any systematic pre-authorized transaction under your Contract is scheduled to occur on a “corresponding date” that does not exist in a given calendar period or is scheduled to occur on the last day of the month that is not a Business Day, the transaction will be deemed to occur on the last Business Day of the month.

Example: If your Contract is issued on February 29 in year 1 (a leap year), your Contract Anniversary in years 2, 3 and 4 will be on February 28.

Example: If your Annuity Date is January 31, and you select monthly annuity payments, the payments received will be made on February 28 (or 29 in a leap year), March 31, April 30, May 31, June 30, July 31, August 31, September 30, October 31, November 30, and December 31 if those days are Business Days. Otherwise, the payment will be made on the last Business Day of the applicable month.

Age and Sex of Annuitant

The Contracts generally provide for sex-distinct annuity income factors in the case of life annuities. Statistically, females tend to have longer life expectancies than males; consequently, if the amount of annuity payments is based on life expectancy, they will ordinarily be higher if an annuitant is male than if an annuitant is female. Certain states’ regulations prohibit sex-distinct annuity income factors, and Contracts issued in those states will use unisex factors. In addition, Contracts issued in connection with Qualified Plans are required to use unisex factors.

We may require proof of your Annuitant’s age and sex before or after commencing annuity payments. If the age or sex (or both) of your Annuitant are incorrectly stated in your Contract, we will correct the amount payable to equal the amount that the annuitized portion of the Contract Value under that Contract would have purchased for your Annuitant’s correct age and sex. If we make the correction after annuity payments have started, and we have made overpayments based on the incorrect information, we will deduct the amount of the overpayment, with interest as stated in your Contract, from any payments due then or later; if we have made underpayments, we will add the amount, with interest as stated in your Contract, of the underpayments to the next payment we make after we receive proof of the correct age and/or sex.

Additionally, we may require proof of the Annuitant’s or Owner’s age before any payments associated with the Death Benefit provisions of your Contract are made. If the age or sex of the Annuitant is incorrectly stated in your Contract, we will base any payment associated with the Death Benefit provisions on your Contract on the Annuitant’s or Owner’s correct age or sex.

Systematic Transfer Program

The systematic transfer option is subject to the same requirements and restrictions as non-systematic transfers. Work with your Schwab Financial Consultant prior to electing portfolio rebalancing.

Portfolio Rebalancing

Portfolio rebalancing allows you to maintain the percentage of your Contract Value allocated to each Variable Investment Option at a pre-set level prior to annuitization.

For example, you could specify that 30% of your Contract Value should be in Subaccount A, 40% in Subaccount B, and 30% in Subaccount C.

Over time, the variations in each Subaccount’s investment results will shift this balance of these Subaccount Value allocations. If you elect the portfolio rebalancing feature, we will automatically transfer your Subaccount Value back to the percentages you specify.

You may choose to have rebalances made quarterly, semi-annually or annually.

You may make your request at any time prior to your Annuity Date and it will be effective when we receive it In Proper Form. If you stop portfolio rebalancing, you must wait 30 days to begin again. Currently, we are not enforcing the 30-day waiting period but we reserve the right to enforce such waiting period in the future. If you specify a date fewer than 30 days after your Contract Date, your first rebalance will be delayed one month, and if you request rebalancing on your application but do not specify a date for the first rebalance, it will occur one period after your Contract Date. We may change, terminate or suspend the portfolio rebalancing feature at any time. Portfolio rebalancing will stop on the Annuity Date.

Pre-Authorized Withdrawals

You may specify a dollar amount for your pre-authorized withdrawals, or you may specify a percentage of your Contract Value or an Account Value. You may direct us to make your pre-authorized withdrawals from one or more specific Investment Options. If you do not give us these specific instructions, amounts will be deducted proportionately from your Account Value in each Investment Option.

Procedures for selecting pre-authorized withdrawals are generally the same as those discussed in detail above for selecting portfolio rebalancing: You may make your request at any time and it will be effective when we receive it In Proper Form. If you stop the pre-authorized withdrawals, you must wait 30 days to begin again. Currently, we are not enforcing the 30-day waiting period but we reserve the right to enforce such waiting period in the future.

Each pre-authorized withdrawal is subject to any applicable charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes, to federal income tax on its taxable portion, and, if you have not reached age 591/2, may be subject to a 10% federal tax penalty.

More on Federal Tax Issues

Section 817(h) of the Code provides that the investments underlying a variable annuity must satisfy certain diversification requirements. Details on these diversification requirements generally appear in the Fund SAIs. We believe the underlying Variable Investment Options for the Contract meet these requirements. On March 7, 2008, the Treasury Department issued Final Regulations under Section 817(h). These Final Regulations do not provide guidance concerning the extent to which you may direct your investments to particular divisions of a separate account. Such guidance may be included in regulations or revenue rulings under Section 817(d) relating to the definition of a variable contract. We reserve the right to make such changes as we deem necessary or appropriate to ensure that your Contract continues to qualify as an annuity for tax purposes. Any such changes will apply uniformly to affected Contract Owners and will be made with such notice to affected Contract Owners as is feasible under the circumstances.

For a variable life insurance contract or a variable annuity contract to qualify for tax deferral, assets in the separate accounts supporting the contract must be considered to be owned by the insurance company and not by the contract owner. Under current U.S. tax law, if a contract owner has excessive control over the investments made by a separate account, or the underlying fund, the contract owner will be taxed currently on income and gains from the account or fund. In other words, in such a case of “investor control” the contract owner would not derive the tax benefits normally associated with variable life insurance or variable annuities.

Generally, according to the IRS, there are two ways that impermissible investor control may exist. The first relates to the design of the contract or the relationship between the contract and a separate account or underlying fund. For example, at various times, the IRS has focused on, among other factors, the number and type of investment choices available pursuant to a given variable contract, whether the contract offers access to funds that are available to the general public, the number of transfers that a contract owner may make from one investment option to another, and the degree to which a contract owner may select or control particular investments.

With respect to this first aspect of investor control, we believe that the design of our contracts and the relationship between our contracts and the Portfolios satisfy the current view of the IRS on this subject, such that the investor control doctrine should not apply. However, because of some uncertainty with respect to this subject and because the IRS may issue further guidance on this subject, we reserve the right to make such changes as we deem necessary or appropriate to reduce the risk that your contract might not qualify as a life insurance contract or as an annuity for tax purposes.

The second way that impermissible investor control might exist concerns your actions. Under the IRS pronouncements, you may not select or control particular investments, other than choosing among broad investment choices such as selecting a particular Portfolio. You may not select or direct the purchase or sale of a particular investment of a Separate Account, a Subaccount (or Variable Investment Option), or a Portfolio. All investment decisions concerning the Separate Accounts and the Subaccounts must be made by us, and all investment decisions concerning the underlying Portfolios must be made by the portfolio manager for such Portfolio in his or her sole and absolute discretion, and not by the contract owner. Furthermore, under the IRS pronouncements, you may not enter into an agreement or arrangement with a portfolio manager of a Portfolio or communicate directly or indirectly with such a portfolio manager or any related investment officers concerning the selection, quality, or rate of return of any specific investment or group of investments held by a Portfolio, and you may not enter into any such agreement or arrangement or have any such communication with us or PLFA.

Finally, the IRS may issue additional guidance on the investor control doctrine, which might further restrict your actions or features of the variable contract. Such guidance could be applied retroactively. If any of the rules outlined above are not complied with, the IRS may seek to tax you currently on income and gains from a Portfolio such that you would not derive the tax benefits normally associated with variable life insurance or variable annuities. Although highly unlikely, such an event may have an adverse impact on the fund and other variable contracts. We urge you to consult your own tax adviser with respect to the application of the investor control doctrine.

Safekeeping of Assets

We are responsible for the safekeeping of the assets of the Separate Account. These assets are held separate and apart from the assets of our General Account and our other separate accounts.

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The statements of assets and liabilities of Separate Account A as of December 31, 2011, the related statements of operations for the periods presented, the statements of changes in net assets for each of the periods presented and the financial highlights for each of the periods presented are incorporated by reference in this Statement of Additional Information from the Annual Report of Separate Account A dated December 31, 2011. Pacific Life’s consolidated financial statements as of December 31, 2011 and 2010 and for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2011 are attached. These financial statements should be considered only as bearing on the ability of Pacific Life to meet its obligations under the Contracts and not as bearing on the investment performance of the assets held in the Separate Account.

INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

AND INDEPENDENT AUDITORS

The financial statements of Separate Account A of Pacific Life Insurance Company as of December 31, 2011 and for each of the periods presented have been audited by Deloitte & Touche LLP, 695 Town Center Drive, Costa Mesa, CA 92626, independent registered public accounting firm, as stated in their report included in the Annual Report of Separate Account A dated December 31, 2011, which is incorporated by reference in this Registration Statement.

The consolidated financial statements of Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries as of December 31, 2011 and 2010 and for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2011 have been audited by Deloitte & Touche LLP, 695 Town Center Drive, Costa Mesa, CA 92626, independent auditors, as stated in their report appearing herein.

Deloitte & Touche LLP
Suite 1200
695 Town Center Drive
Costa Mesa, CA 92626-7188
USA

Tel: +1 714 436 7100
Fax: +1 714 436 7200
www.deloitte.com

INDEPENDENT AUDITORS’ REPORT

Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries:

We have audited the accompanying consolidated statements of financial condition of Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries (the Company) as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, and the related consolidated statements of operations, equity and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2011. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.

We conducted our audits in accordance with auditing standards generally accepted in the United States of America. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes consideration of internal control over financial reporting as a basis for designing audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting. Accordingly, we express no such opinion. An audit also includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

In our opinion, such consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2011 in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.

As discussed in Note 1 to the consolidated financial statements, the Company changed its method of accounting and reporting for deferred policy acquisition costs in 2011. In addition, the Company changed its method of accounting and reporting for other than temporary impairments as required by accounting guidance adopted in 2009.

April 12, 2012

PL-2

Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION


	December 31,
	2011		2010
	(In Millions)
ASSETS
Investments:
Fixed maturity securities available for sale, at estimated fair value	$	28,853	$	28,313
Equity securities available for sale, at estimated fair value		301		279
Mortgage loans		7,599		6,693
Policy loans		6,812		6,690
Other investments (includes VIE assets of $351 and $263)		2,319		2,247

TOTAL INVESTMENTS		45,884		44,222
Cash and cash equivalents (includes VIE assets of $26 and $4)		2,829		2,270
Restricted cash (includes VIE assets of $200 and $170)		280		214
Deferred policy acquisition costs		5,263		4,435
Aircraft leasing portfolio, net (includes VIE assets of $1,838 and $2,154)		5,845		5,259
Other assets (includes VIE assets of $32 and $40)		3,069		2,579
Separate account assets		51,450		55,683

TOTAL ASSETS	$	114,620	$	114,662


LIABILITIES AND EQUITY
Liabilities:
Policyholder account balances	$	34,392	$	35,076
Future policy benefits		9,467		7,080
Long-term debt (includes VIE debt of $1,150 and $1,592)		7,152		6,516
Other liabilities (includes VIE liabilities of $338 and $388)		2,983		2,377
Separate account liabilities		51,450		55,683

TOTAL LIABILITIES		105,444		106,732


Commitments and contingencies (Note 21)

Stockholder’s Equity:
Common stock — $50 par value; 600,000 shares authorized, issued and outstanding		30		30
Paid-in capital		982		982
Retained earnings		6,896		6,359
Accumulated other comprehensive income		934		308

Total Stockholder’s Equity		8,842		7,679
Noncontrolling interest		334		251

TOTAL EQUITY		9,176		7,930

TOTAL LIABILITIES AND EQUITY	$	114,620	$	114,662

The abbreviation VIE above means variable interest entity.

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

PL-3

Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS


	Years Ended December 31,
	2011			2010			2009
	(In Millions)
REVENUES
Policy fees and insurance premiums	$	3,081		$	2,367		$	2,275
Net investment income		2,186			2,122			1,862
Net realized investment gain (loss)		(661	)		(94	)		153
OTTIs, consisting of $409, $328 and $641 in total, net of $256, $215 and $330 recognized in OCI		(153	)		(113	)		(311	)
Investment advisory fees		268			245			208
Aircraft leasing revenue		607			591			578
Other income		226			230			137

TOTAL REVENUES		5,554			5,348			4,902


BENEFITS AND EXPENSES
Policy benefits paid or provided		1,951			1,351			1,226
Interest credited to policyholder account balances		1,318			1,317			1,253
Commission expenses		83			831			691
Operating and other expenses		1,293			1,264			1,246

TOTAL BENEFITS AND EXPENSES		4,645			4,763			4,416


INCOME FROM CONTINUING OPERATIONS BEFORE PROVISION FOR INCOME TAXES		909			585			486
Provision for income taxes		146			63			44


INCOME FROM CONTINUING OPERATIONS		763			522			442
Discontinued operations, net of taxes		(9	)					(20	)


Net income		754			522			422
Less: net (income) loss attributable to the noncontrolling interest from continuing operations		(71	)		(50	)		14


NET INCOME ATTRIBUTABLE TO THE COMPANY	$	683		$	472		$	436

The abbreviation OTTIs above means other than temporary impairment losses.

The abbreviation OCI above means other comprehensive income (loss).

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

PL-4

Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF EQUITY


								Accumulated Other
								Comprehensive Income (Loss)
								Unrealized
								Gain (Loss) On
								Derivatives
								and Securities						Total
	Common		Paid-in		Retained			Available for			Other,			Stockholder’s			Noncontrolling			Total
	Stock		Capital		Earnings			Sale, Net			Net			Equity			Interest			Equity
	(In Millions)
BALANCES, DECEMBER 31, 2008	$	30	$	782	$	5,426		$	(1,751	)	$	(51	)	$	4,436		$	244		$	4,680
Cumulative effect of adoption of new accounting principle, net of tax						175			(170	)					5						5
Comprehensive income (loss):
Net income (loss)						436									436			(14	)		422
Other comprehensive income (loss)									1,562			47			1,609			(7	)		1,602

Total comprehensive income															2,045						2,024
Contribution to parent				200											200						200
Change in equity of noncontrolling interest																		8			8

BALANCES, DECEMBER 31, 2009		30		982		6,037			(359	)		(4	)		6,686			231			6,917
Comprehensive income:
Net income						472									472			50			522
Other comprehensive income									669			2			671						671

Total comprehensive income															1,143						1,193
Dividend to parent						(150	)								(150	)					(150	)
Change in equity of noncontrolling interest																		(30	)		(30	)

BALANCES, DECEMBER 31, 2010		30		982		6,359			310			(2	)		7,679			251			7,930
Comprehensive income (loss):
Net income						683									683			71			754
Other comprehensive income (loss)									638			(12	)		626						626

Total comprehensive income															1,309						1,380
Dividend to parent						(125	)								(125	)					(125	)
Non-cash dividend to parent						(21	)								(21	)					(21	)
Change in equity of noncontrolling interest																		12			12

BALANCES, DECEMBER 31, 2011	$	30	$	982	$	6,896		$	948		$	(14	)	$	8,842		$	334		$	9,176

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

PL-5

Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS


	Years Ended December 31,
	2011			2010			2009
	(In Millions)
CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES
Net income from continuing operations	$	763		$	522		$	442
Adjustments to reconcile net income from continuing operations to net cash provided by operating activities:
Net accretion on fixed maturity securities		(116	)		(136	)		(142	)
Depreciation and amortization		329			299			281
Deferred income taxes		141			56			451
Net realized investment (gain) loss		661			94			(153	)
Other than temporary impairments		153			113			311
Net change in deferred policy acquisition costs		(850	)		116			(202	)
Interest credited to policyholder account balances		1,318			1,317			1,253
Net change in future policy benefits and other insurance liabilities		1,215			648			111
Other operating activities, net		(18	)		(5	)		85

NET CASH PROVIDED BY OPERATING ACTIVITIES BEFORE DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS		3,596			3,024			2,437
Net cash used in operating activities of discontinued operations		(7	)					(27	)

NET CASH PROVIDED BY OPERATING ACTIVITIES		3,589			3,024			2,410

CASH FLOWS FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES
Fixed maturity and equity securities available for sale:
Purchases		(4,808	)		(6,503	)		(5,507	)
Sales		3,159			3,572			1,463
Maturities and repayments		2,256			2,138			2,542
Repayments of mortgage loans		1,172			746			406
Fundings of mortgage loans and real estate		(2,177	)		(870	)		(1,434	)
Net change in policy loans		(122	)		(181	)		411
Change in restricted cash		(66	)		7			6
Purchases of derivative instruments		(79	)		(116	)		(20	)
Terminations of derivative instruments, net		172			(51	)		20
Proceeds from nonhedging derivative settlements		151			9			64
Payments for nonhedging derivative settlements		(505	)		(569	)		(1,540	)
Net change in collateral received or pledged		516			6			(1,226	)
Purchases of and advance payments on aircraft leasing portfolio		(1,397	)		(754	)		(561	)
Acquisition of retrocession business (Note 5)		192
Acquisition of pension advisory business (Note 5)		(45	)
Other investing activities, net		386			265			42

NET CASH USED IN INVESTING ACTIVITIES		(1,195	)		(2,301	)		(5,334	)

(Continued)
See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

PL-6

Pacific Life Insurance Company and Subsidiaries

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

ORGANIZATION AND SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

ORGANIZATION AND DESCRIPTION OF BUSINESS

Pacific Life Insurance Company (Pacific Life) was established in 1868 and is domiciled in the State of Nebraska as a stock life insurance company. Pacific Life is an indirect subsidiary of Pacific Mutual Holding Company (PMHC), a Nebraska mutual holding company, and a wholly owned subsidiary of Pacific LifeCorp, an intermediate Delaware stock holding company. PMHC and Pacific LifeCorp were organized pursuant to consent received from the California Department of Insurance and the implementation of a plan of conversion to form a mutual holding company structure in 1997 (the Conversion).

Effective December 31, 2009, Pacific LifeCorp contributed its 100% stock ownership of Aviation Capital Group Corp. (ACG) to Pacific Life (Note 9). ACG is engaged in the acquisition and leasing of commercial jet aircraft. These financial statements and the accompanying footnotes have been prepared by combining the previously separate financial statements of Pacific Life and ACG as if the two entities had been combined as of the beginning of 2009, the first period presented in these consolidated financial statements. This retrospective treatment is prescribed by accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America (U.S. GAAP) whenever a transfer between entities under common control is effected.

Pacific Life and its subsidiaries and affiliates have primary business operations consisting of life insurance, annuities, mutual funds, and aircraft leasing.

BASIS OF PRESENTATION AND PRINCIPLES OF CONSOLIDATION

The accompanying consolidated financial statements of Pacific Life and its subsidiaries (the Company) have been prepared in accordance with U.S. GAAP and include the accounts of Pacific Life and its majority owned and controlled subsidiaries and variable interest entities (VIEs) in which the Company is the primary beneficiary. Noncontrolling interest is primarily comprised of private equity funds (Note 4). All significant intercompany transactions and balances have been eliminated in consolidation.

Pacific Life prepares its regulatory financial statements in accordance with statutory accounting practices prescribed or permitted by the Nebraska Department of Insurance (NE DOI), which is a comprehensive basis of accounting other than U.S. GAAP (Note 2). These consolidated financial statements materially differ from those filed with regulatory authorities.

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with U.S. GAAP requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities as of the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates.

In developing these estimates, management makes subjective and complex judgments that are inherently uncertain and subject to material change as facts and circumstances develop. Management has identified the following estimates as critical, as they involve a higher degree of judgment and are subject to a significant degree of variability:

•

The fair value of investments in the absence of quoted market values

•

Other than temporary impairment losses (OTTI) of investments

•

Application of the consolidation rules to certain investments

•

The fair value of and accounting for derivatives

•

Aircraft valuation and impairment

•

The capitalization and amortization of deferred policy acquisition costs (DAC)

•

The liability for future policyholder benefits

•

Accounting for income taxes

•

Accounting for business combinations

•

Accounting for reinsurance transactions

•

Litigation and other contingencies

Certain reclassifications have been made to the 2010 and 2009 consolidated financial statements to conform to the 2011 financial statement presentation.

PL-8

The Company has evaluated events subsequent to December 31, 2011 through April 12, 2012, the date the consolidated financial statements were available to be issued. See Note 2 for discussion of subsequent event.

CHANGE IN ACCOUNTING METHOD

Effective October 1, 2011, the Company changed its DAC amortization method for universal life-type contracts. Management determined it was preferable to provide a more constant rate of positive or negative amortization in relation to the emergence of gross profits over the lives of the contracts. During reporting periods in which actual gross profits (AGPs) are negative, DAC amortization may be negative, which would result in an increase of the DAC asset balance. The facts and circumstances surrounding potential negative amortization are considered to determine whether it is appropriate for recognition in the consolidated financial statements. Additionally, negative amortization is only recorded when the increased DAC asset balance is determined to be recoverable and is also limited to amounts originally deferred plus interest. The Company’s previous accounting method eliminated to zero DAC amortization in reporting periods in which the AGPs were negative.

The Company accounted for this change in accounting estimate effected by a change in accounting method prospectively, resulting in an increase to the DAC asset balance of $618 million and a decrease to commission expenses of $502 million and operating and other expenses of $116 million, pre-tax, and an increase to net income and total equity of $402 million, after tax, in the accompanying consolidated financial statements as of and for the year ended December 31, 2011.

RECENTLY ADOPTED ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS

In April 2009, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) issued additional guidance under the Accounting Standards Codification’s (Codification) Investments — Debt and Equity Securities Topic. For debt securities, this guidance replaced the management assertion that it has the intent and ability to hold an impaired debt security until recovery with the requirement that management assert if it either has the intent to sell the debt security or if it is more likely than not the entity will be required to sell the debt security before recovery of its amortized cost basis. If management intends to sell the debt security or it is more likely than not the entity will be required to sell the debt security before recovery of its amortized cost basis, an OTTI shall be recognized in earnings equal to the entire difference between the debt security’s amortized cost basis and its estimated fair value at the reporting date. After the recognition of an OTTI, the debt security is accounted for as if it had been purchased on the measurement date of the OTTI, with an amortized cost basis equal to the previous amortized cost basis less the OTTI recognized in earnings. The update also changed the presentation in the financial statements of non credit related impairment amounts for instruments within its scope. When the entity asserts it does not have the intent to sell the security and it is more likely than not it will not have to sell the security before recovery of its amortized cost basis, only the credit related impairment losses are recognized in earnings and non credit losses are recognized in other comprehensive income (loss) (OCI). Additionally, this update provides for enhanced presentation and disclosure of OTTIs of debt and equity securities in the consolidated financial statements. The Company early adopted this guidance effective January 1, 2009, resulting in an after tax decrease to OCI of $170 million, including an after tax DAC impact of $5 million, and an after tax increase to retained earnings of $175 million.

FUTURE ADOPTION OF NEW ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS

In October 2010, the FASB issued Accounting Standards Update (ASU) 2010-26 to the Codification’s Financial Services — Insurance Topic. ASU 2010-26 significantly amends the guidance applicable to accounting for costs associated with acquiring or renewing insurance contracts. The amendment specifies the following costs incurred in the acquisition of new and renewal contracts should be capitalized: 1) incremental direct costs of contract acquisition and 2) certain costs related directly to underwriting, policy issuance and processing, medical and inspecting, and sales force contract selling activities. This amendment also specifies that costs may only be capitalized based on successful contract acquisition efforts. The Company will adopt this standard retrospectively on January 1, 2012, resulting in a write-down of the Company’s DAC asset relating to those costs, which no longer meet the revised standard. The Company estimates that the DAC asset will be reduced by approximately $1.0 billion to $1.2 billion and total equity will be reduced by approximately $650 million to $780 million, after tax, as of the date of adoption.

In May 2011, the FASB issued ASU 2011-04 which modifies the Codification’s Fair Value Measurements and Disclosures Topic. The Company will adopt this new guidance in the fourth quarter of 2012 and will apply it prospectively. The Company expects this guidance to have an impact on its financial statement disclosures and no impact on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

In June 2011, the FASB issued ASU 2011-05 to the Codification’s Comprehensive Income Topic. ASU 2011-05 revises the manner in which a company presents comprehensive income on the financial statements. The amendment requires a company to present each component of net income along with total net income, each component of OCI along with a total for OCI, and a total

PL-9

amount for comprehensive income. The Company will adopt this amendment in the fourth quarter of 2012. Adoption will not have an impact on the Company’s financial position, results of operations or cash flows, however, adoption will result in the presentation of a new consolidated statement of comprehensive income immediately following the consolidated statement of operations.

INVESTMENTS

Fixed maturity and equity securities available for sale are reported at estimated fair value, with unrealized gains and losses, net of adjustments related to DAC, future policy benefits and deferred income taxes, recognized as a component of OCI. For mortgage-backed securities and asset-backed securities included in fixed maturity securities available for sale, the Company recognizes income using a constant effective yield based on anticipated prepayments and the estimated economic life of the securities. When estimates of prepayments change, the effective yield is recalculated to reflect actual payments to date and anticipated future payments. For fixed rate securities, the net investment in the securities is adjusted to the amount that would have existed had the new effective yield been applied since the acquisition of the securities. These adjustments are reflected in net investment income. Trading securities, which are included in other investments, are reported at estimated fair value with changes in estimated fair value included in net realized investment gain (loss).

Investment income consists primarily of interest and dividends, net investment income from partnership interests, prepayment fees on fixed maturity securities and mortgage loans, and income from certain derivatives. Interest is recognized on an accrual basis and dividends are recorded on the ex-dividend date. Amortization of premium and accretion of discount on fixed maturity securities is recorded using the effective interest method.

The Company’s available for sale securities are regularly assessed for OTTIs. If a decline in the estimated fair value of an available for sale security is deemed to be other than temporary, the OTTI is recognized equal to the difference between the estimated fair value and net carrying amount of the security. If the OTTI for a fixed maturity security is attributable to both credit and other factors, then the OTTI is bifurcated and the non credit related portion is recognized in OCI while the credit portion is recognized in earnings. If the OTTI is related to credit factors only, it is recognized in earnings.

The evaluation of OTTIs is a quantitative and qualitative process subject to significant estimates and management judgment. The Company has rigorous controls and procedures in place to monitor securities and identify those that are subject to greater analysis for OTTIs. The Company has an investment impairment committee that reviews and evaluates securities for potential OTTIs at least on a quarterly basis.

In evaluating whether a decline in value is other than temporary, the Company considers many factors including, but not limited to, the following: the extent and duration of the decline in value; the reasons for the decline (credit event, currency, interest rate related, or spread widening); the ability and intent to hold the investment for a period of time to allow for a recovery of value; and the financial condition of and near-term prospects of the issuer.

Analysis of the probability that all cash flows will be collected under the contractual terms of a fixed maturity security and determination as to whether the Company does not intend to sell the security and that it is more likely than not that the Company will not be required to sell the security before recovery of the investment are key factors in determining whether a fixed maturity security is other than temporarily impaired.

For mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities, scrutiny was placed on the performance of the underlying collateral and projected future cash flows. In projecting future cash flows, the Company incorporates inputs from third-party sources and applies reasonable judgment in developing assumptions used to estimate the probability and timing of collecting all contractual cash flows.

In evaluating investment grade perpetual preferred securities, which do not have final contractual cash flows, the Company applied OTTI considerations used for debt securities, placing emphasis on the probability that all cash flows will be collected under the contractual terms of the security and the Company’s intent and ability to hold the security to allow for a recovery of value. Perpetual preferred securities are reported as equity securities as they are structured in equity form, but have significant debt-like characteristics, including periodic dividends, call features, and credit ratings and pricing similar to debt securities.

Realized gains and losses on investment transactions are determined on a specific identification basis and are included in net realized investment gain (loss).

Mortgage loans on real estate are carried at their unpaid principal balance, net of deferred origination fees and write-downs. Mortgage loans are considered to be impaired when management estimates that based upon current information and events, it is probable that the Company will not be able to collect all amounts due according to the contractual terms of the mortgage loan

PL-10

agreement. For mortgage loans deemed to be impaired, an impairment loss is recorded when the carrying amount is greater than the Company’s estimated fair value of the underlying collateral of the loan. When the underlying collateral of the mortgage loan is greater than the carrying amount, the mortgage loan is not considered to have an impaired loss and no write-down is recorded.

Policy loans are stated at unpaid principal balances.

Other investments primarily consist of partnership and joint ventures, real estate investments, derivative instruments, non-marketable equity securities, and low income housing investments qualifying for tax credits (LIHTC). Non-marketable equity securities are carried at estimated fair value with unrealized gains or losses recognized in OCI. Partnership and joint venture interests where the Company does not have a controlling interest or majority ownership are recorded under the cost or equity method of accounting depending on the equity ownership position. Real estate investments are carried at depreciated cost, net of write-downs, or, for real estate acquired in satisfaction of debt, estimated fair value less estimated selling costs at the date of acquisition, if lower than the related unpaid balance.

Real estate investments are evaluated for impairment based on the undiscounted cash flows expected to be received during the estimated holding period. When the undiscounted cash flows are less than the current carrying value of the property (gross cost less accumulated depreciation), the property is considered impaired and will be written-down to its estimated fair value.

Investments in LIHTC are recorded under the effective interest method, if they meet certain requirements, including a projected positive yield based solely on guaranteed credits. The amortization of the original investment and the tax credits are recorded in the provision for income taxes.

All derivatives, whether designated in hedging relationships or not, are required to be recorded at estimated fair value. If the derivative is designated as a cash flow hedge, the effective portion of changes in the estimated fair value of the derivative is recorded in OCI and recognized in earnings when the hedged item affects earnings. See discussion of the discontinuance of cash flow hedge accounting for insurance operations in Note 10. If the derivative is designated as a fair value hedge, changes in the estimated fair value of the hedging derivative, including amounts measured as ineffectiveness, and changes in the estimated fair value of the hedged item related to the designated risk being hedged, are reported in net realized investment gain (loss). The change in estimated value of the hedged item associated with the risk being hedged is reflected as an adjustment to the carrying amount of the hedged item. For derivative instruments not designated as hedges, the change in estimated fair value of the derivative is recorded in net realized investment gain (loss).

The periodic cash flows for all hedging derivatives are recorded consistent with the hedged item on an accrual basis. For derivatives that are hedging securities, these amounts are included in net investment income. For derivatives that are hedging liabilities, these amounts are included in interest credited to policyholder account balances or interest expense, which is included in operating and other expenses. For derivatives not designated as hedging instruments, the periodic cash flows are reflected in net realized investment gain (loss) on an accrual basis. Upon termination of a cash flow hedging relationship, the accumulated amount in OCI is amortized into net investment income or interest credited to policyholder account balances over the remaining life of the hedged item. Upon termination of a fair value hedging relationship, the accumulated adjustment to the carrying value of the hedged item is amortized into net investment income or interest expense, which is included in operating and other expenses, or interest credited to policyholder account balances over its remaining life.

CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS

Cash and cash equivalents include all investments with a maturity of three months or less from purchase date. Cash equivalents consist primarily of U.S. Treasury bills and money market securities.

RESTRICTED CASH

Restricted cash primarily consists of liquidity reserves related to VIEs, security deposits, commitment fees, maintenance reserve payments and rental payments received from certain lessees related to the aircraft leasing business.

DEFERRED POLICY ACQUISITION COSTS

The costs of acquiring new insurance business, principally commissions, medical examinations, underwriting, policy issue and other expenses, all of which vary with and are primarily associated with the production of new business, are deferred and recorded as an asset referred to as DAC. DAC related to internally replaced contracts (as defined in the Codification’s Financial Services — Insurance Topic), is immediately written off to expense and any new deferrable expenses associated with the replacement are deferred if the contract modification substantially changes the contract. However, if the contract modification does not substantially

PL-11

change the contract, the existing DAC asset remains in place and any acquisition costs associated with the modification are immediately expensed. The Company defers sales inducements and amortizes them over the life of the policy using the same methodology and assumptions used to amortize DAC.

For universal life (UL), variable annuities and other investment-type contracts, acquisition costs are amortized through earnings in proportion to the present value of estimated gross profits (EGPs) from projected investment, mortality and expense margins, and surrender charges over the estimated lives of the contracts. Actual gross margins or profits may vary from management’s estimates, which can increase or decrease the rate of DAC amortization. DAC related to traditional policies is amortized through earnings over the premium-paying period of the related policies in proportion to premium revenues recognized, using assumptions and estimates consistent with those used in computing policy reserves. DAC related to certain unrealized components in OCI, primarily unrealized gains and losses on securities available for sale, is adjusted with corresponding charges or benefits, respectively, directly to equity through OCI.

Effective October 1, 2011, the Company changed its DAC amortization method for periods when AGPs are negative. During reporting periods of negative AGPs, DAC amortization may be negative, which would result in an increase to the DAC balance. The specific facts and circumstances surrounding the potential negative amortization are evaluated to determine whether it is appropriate for recognition in the consolidated financial statements. Negative amortization is only recorded when the increased DAC balance is determined to be recoverable and is also limited to amounts originally deferred plus interest.

Significant assumptions in the development of EGPs include investment returns, surrender and lapse rates, rider utilization, interest spreads, and mortality margins. The Company’s long-term assumption for the underlying separate account investment return ranges up to 8.0%. A change in the assumptions utilized to develop EGPs results in a change to amounts expensed in the reporting period in which the change was made by adjusting the DAC balance to the level DAC would have been had the EGPs been calculated using the new assumptions over the entire amortization period. In general, favorable experience variances result in increased expected future profitability and may lower the rate of DAC amortization, whereas unfavorable experience variances result in decreased expected future profitability and may increase the rate of DAC amortization. All critical assumptions utilized to develop EGPs are evaluated at least annually and necessary revisions are made to certain assumptions to the extent that actual or anticipated experience necessitates such a prospective change. The Company may also identify and implement actuarial modeling refinements to projection models that may result in increases or decreases to the DAC asset.

The DAC asset is reviewed periodically to ensure that the unamortized balance does not exceed expected recoverable EGPs.

AIRCRAFT LEASING PORTFOLIO

Aircraft are recorded at depreciated cost, which includes certain acquisition costs. Depreciation to estimated residual values is computed using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the aircraft. Estimated residuals values are based on a percentage of the acquisition cost. Major improvements to aircraft are capitalized when incurred and depreciated over the shorter of the useful life of the aircraft or the useful life of the improvement. The Company evaluates carrying values of aircraft based upon changes in market and other physical and economic conditions and will record impairments to recognize a loss in the value of the aircraft when management believes that, based on future estimated cash flows, the recoverability of the Company’s investment in an aircraft has been impaired.

GOODWILL

Goodwill represents the excess of acquisition costs over the fair value of net assets acquired. Goodwill is not amortized but is reviewed for impairment at least annually or more frequently if events occur or circumstances indicate that the goodwill might be impaired. Goodwill is included in other assets and totaled $87 million and $43 million as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively. See Note 5. There were no goodwill impairment write-downs during the years ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009.

POLICYHOLDER ACCOUNT BALANCES

Policyholder account balances on UL and investment-type contracts, such as funding agreements, annuities without life contingencies, deposit liabilities and guaranteed interest contracts (GICs), are valued using the retrospective deposit method and are equal to accumulated account values, which consist of deposits received, plus interest credited, less withdrawals and assessments. Interest credited to these contracts primarily ranged from 0.2% to 7.7%.

PL-12

FUTURE POLICY BENEFITS

Annuity reserves, which primarily consist of group retirement and structured settlement annuities with life contingencies, are equal to the present value of estimated future payments using pricing assumptions, as applicable, for interest rates, mortality, morbidity, retirement age and expenses. Interest rates used in establishing such liabilities ranged from 0.4% to 11.0%.

The Company offers variable annuity contracts with guaranteed minimum benefits, including guaranteed minimum death benefits (GMDBs) and riders with guaranteed living benefits (GLBs) that guarantee net principal over a ten-year holding period or a minimum withdrawal benefit over specified periods, subject to certain restrictions. If the guarantee includes a benefit that is only attainable upon annuitization or is wholly life contingent (e.g. GMDBs or guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefits for life), it is accounted for as an insurance liability (Note 12). All other GLB guarantees are accounted for as embedded derivatives (Note 10).

Policy charges assessed against policyholders that represent compensation to the Company for services to be provided in future periods, or unearned revenue reserves (URR), are recognized in revenue over the expected life of the contract using the same methods and assumptions used to amortize DAC. Unearned revenue related to certain unrealized components in OCI, primarily unrealized gains and losses on securities available for sale, is recorded to equity through OCI.

Life insurance reserves are valued using the net level premium method on the basis of actuarial assumptions appropriate at policy issue. Mortality and persistency assumptions are generally based on the Company’s experience, which, together with interest and expense assumptions, include a margin for possible unfavorable deviations. Interest rate assumptions ranged from 3.0% to 9.3%. Future dividends for participating business are provided for in the liability for future policy benefits.

As of December 31, 2011 and 2010, participating experience rated policies paying dividends represent less than 1% of direct life insurance in force.

Estimates of future policy benefit reserves and liabilities are continually reviewed and, as experience develops, are adjusted as necessary. Such changes in estimates are included in earnings for the period in which such changes occur.

REINSURANCE

The Company has ceded reinsurance agreements with other insurance companies to limit potential losses, reduce exposure arising from larger risks, provide additional capacity for future growth and has assumed reinsurance agreements intended to offset reinsurance costs. As part of a strategic alliance, the Company also reinsures risks associated with policies written by an independent producer group through modified coinsurance and yearly renewable term (YRT) arrangements with this producer group’s reinsurance company. The ceding of risk does not discharge the Company from its primary obligations to contract owners. To the extent that the assuming companies become unable to meet their obligations under reinsurance contracts, the Company remains contingently liable. Each reinsurer is reviewed to evaluate its financial stability before entering into each reinsurance contract and throughout the period that the reinsurance contract is in place. The Company also assumes reinsurance from affiliated and unaffiliated insurers. In August 2011, the Company acquired a retrocession business (Note 5).

All assets associated with business reinsured on a modified coinsurance basis remain with, and under the control of, the Company. As part of its risk management process, the Company routinely evaluates its reinsurance programs and may change retention limits, reinsurers or other features at any time.

Reinsurance accounting is utilized for ceded and assumed transactions when risk transfer provisions have been met. To meet risk transfer requirements, a reinsurance contract must include insurance risk, consisting of both underwriting and timing risk, and a reasonable possibility of a significant loss to the reinsurer.

Reinsurance premiums ceded and reinsurance recoveries on benefits and claims incurred are deducted from their respective revenue and benefit and expense accounts. Prepaid reinsurance premiums, included in other assets, are premiums that are paid in advance for future coverage. Reinsurance recoverables, included in other assets, include balances due from reinsurance companies for paid and unpaid losses. Amounts receivable and payable are offset for account settlement purposes for contracts where the right of offset exists.

PL-13

REVENUES, BENEFITS AND EXPENSES

Premiums from annuity contracts with life contingencies and traditional life and term insurance contracts, are recognized as revenue when due. Benefits and expenses are provided against such revenues to recognize profits over the estimated lives of the contracts by providing for liabilities for future policy benefits, expenses of contract administration and DAC amortization.

Receipts for UL and investment-type contracts are reported as deposits to either policyholder account balances or separate account liabilities and are not included in revenue. Policy fees consist of mortality charges, surrender charges and expense charges that have been earned and assessed against related account values during the period and also includes the amortization of URR. The timing of policy fee revenue recognition is determined based on the nature of the fees. Benefits and expenses include policy benefits and claims incurred in the period that are in excess of related policyholder account balances, interest credited to policyholder account balances, expenses of contract administration and the amortization of DAC.

Investment advisory fees are primarily fees earned by Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC (PLFA), a wholly owned subsidiary of Pacific Life, which serves as the investment advisor for the Pacific Select Fund, an investment vehicle provided to the Company’s variable universal life (VUL) and variable annuity contract holders, and the Pacific Life Funds, the investment vehicle for the Company’s mutual fund products. These fees are based upon the net asset value of the underlying portfolios and are recorded as earned. Related subadvisory expense is included in operating and other expenses and recorded when incurred.

Aircraft leases, which are structured as triple net leases, are accounted for as operating leases. Aircraft leasing revenue is recognized ratably over the terms of the lease agreements.

DEPRECIATION AND AMORTIZATION

Aircraft and certain other assets are depreciated or amortized using the straight-line method over estimated useful lives, which range from three to 40 years. Depreciation and amortization of aircraft under operating leases and certain other assets are included in operating and other expenses. Depreciation of investment real estate is computed using the straight-line method over estimated useful lives, which range from five to 30 years, and is included in net investment income.

INCOME TAXES

Pacific Life and its includable subsidiaries are included in the consolidated Federal income tax return of PMHC. Pacific Life, Pacific Life & Annuity Company (PL&A), an Arizona domiciled life insurance company, and Pacific Alliance Reinsurance Company of Vermont (PAR Vermont), a Vermont-based life reinsurance company, both wholly owned by Pacific Life, are taxed as life insurance companies for Federal income tax purposes. Pacific Life’s non-insurance subsidiaries are either included in PMHC’s combined California franchise tax return or, if necessary, file separate state tax returns. Companies included in the consolidated Federal income tax return of PMHC and/or the combined California franchise tax return of PMHC are allocated tax expense or benefit based principally on the effect of including their operations in PMHC’s returns under a tax sharing agreement. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognized for the future tax consequences attributable to differences between the financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax basis. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured using enacted tax rates expected to apply to taxable income in the years the differences are expected to be recovered or settled.

CONTINGENCIES

Each reporting cycle, the Company evaluates all identified contingent matters on an individual basis. A loss is recorded if probable and reasonably estimable. The Company establishes reserves for these contingencies at the best estimate, or, if no one number within the range of possible losses is more probable than any other, the Company records an estimated reserve at the low end of the range of losses.

SEPARATE ACCOUNTS

Separate accounts primarily include variable annuity and life contracts, as well as other guaranteed and non-guaranteed accounts. Separate account assets are recorded at estimated fair value and represent legally segregated contract holder funds. A separate account liability is recorded equal to the amount of separate account assets. Deposits to separate accounts, investment income and realized and unrealized gains and losses on the separate account assets accrue directly to contract holders and, accordingly, are not reflected in the consolidated statements of operations or cash flows. Amounts charged to the separate account for mortality, surrender and expense charges are included in revenues as policy fees.

PL-14

For separate account funding agreements in which the Company provides a guarantee of principal and interest to the contract holder and bears all the risks and rewards of the investments underlying the separate account, the related investments and liabilities are recognized as investments and liabilities in the consolidated statements of financial condition. Revenue and expenses are recognized within the respective revenue and benefit and expense lines in the consolidated statements of operations.

ESTIMATED FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

The estimated fair value of financial instruments has been determined using available market information and appropriate valuation methodologies. However, considerable judgment is often required to interpret market data to develop the estimates of fair value. Accordingly, the estimates presented may not be indicative of the amounts the Company could realize in a current market exchange. The use of different market assumptions and/or estimation methodologies could have a significant effect on the estimated fair value amounts.

STATUTORY FINANCIAL INFORMATION AND DIVIDEND RESTRICTIONS

STATUTORY ACCOUNTING PRACTICES

Pacific Life prepares its regulatory financial statements in accordance with statutory accounting practices prescribed or permitted by the NE DOI, which is a comprehensive basis of accounting other than U.S. GAAP. Statutory accounting practices primarily differ from U.S. GAAP by charging policy acquisition costs to expense as incurred, recognizing certain policy fees as revenue when billed, establishing future policy benefit liabilities using different actuarial assumptions, reporting surplus notes as surplus instead of debt, as well as the valuation of investments and certain assets and accounting for deferred income taxes on a different basis.

As of December 31, 2011, the Company had two permitted practices. Under the first permitted practice, the Company utilizes book value accounting for certain guaranteed separate account funding agreements. The underlying separate account assets are recorded at book value instead of at fair value as required by National Association of Insurance Commissioners (NAIC) Accounting Practices and Procedures Manual (NAIC SAP). As of December 31, 2011 and 2010, the underlying separate account assets had unrealized losses of $25 million and $24 million, respectively. Under the second permitted practice, which was approved by the Director of the NE DOI in 2011, investments in Working Capital Finance Notes (WCFN), a new type of investment being considered by the NAIC for admissibility, will be treated as admitted assets provided they are rated by the NAIC Securities Valuation Office as an NAIC 1 or 2 investment. As of December 31, 2011, admitted WCFN investments totaled $29 million.

The NE DOI has a prescribed accounting practice for certain synthetic GIC reserves that differs from NAIC SAP. The NE DOI reserve method is based on an annual accumulation of 30% of the contract fees on synthetic GICs and is subject to a maximum of 150% of the annualized contract fees. This reserve amounted to $36 million and $27 million as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively, and has been recorded by the Company. The NAIC SAP basis for this reserve equals the excess, if any, of the value of guaranteed contract liabilities over the market value of the assets in the segregated portfolio less deductions based on asset valuation reserve factors. As of December 31, 2011 and 2010, the reserve for synthetic GICs using the NAIC SAP basis was zero.

STATUTORY NET INCOME (LOSS) AND SURPLUS

Statutory net income (loss) of Pacific Life was ($735) million, $741 million and $652 million for the years ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009, respectively. Statutory capital and surplus of Pacific Life was $5,577 million and $5,867 million as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively.

RISK-BASED CAPITAL

Risk-based capital is a method developed by the NAIC to measure the minimum amount of capital appropriate for an insurance company to support its overall business operations in consideration of its size and risk profile. The formulas for determining the amount of risk-based capital specify various weighting factors that are applied to financial balances or various levels of activity based on the perceived degree of risk. Additionally, certain risks are required to be measured using actuarial cash flow modeling techniques, subject to formulaic minimums. The adequacy of a company’s actual capital is measured by a comparison to the risk-based capital results. Companies below minimum risk-based capital requirements are classified within certain levels, each of which requires specified corrective action. As of December 31, 2011 and 2010, Pacific Life, PL&A and PAR Vermont exceeded the minimum risk-based capital requirements.

PL-15

NO LAPSE GUARANTEE RIDER REINSURANCE

Certain no lapse guarantee rider (NLGR) benefits of Pacific Life’s UL insurance products are subject to Actuarial Guideline 38 (AG 38) statutory reserving requirements. AG 38 results in additional statutory reserves on UL products with NLGRs issued after June 30, 2005. Substantially all statutory reserves relating to NLGRs issued after June 30, 2005 through approximately March 31, 2010 were ceded from Pacific Life to Pacific Alliance Reinsurance Ltd. (PAR Bermuda), a Bermuda-based life reinsurance company wholly owned by Pacific LifeCorp, and PAR Vermont under reinsurance agreements. Effective October 1, 2010, 100% of the PAR Bermuda reinsurance was novated to PAR Vermont, consolidating all such NLGR reinsurance in PAR Vermont. In August 2011, PAR Vermont was accredited as an authorized reinsurer in Nebraska, making it unnecessary to provide security for statutory reserve credits taken by Pacific Life. Funded economic reserves and a letter of credit approved as an admitted asset for PAR Vermont for statutory accounting will continue to be held in a trust with Pacific Life as beneficiary. See Note 21.

DIVIDEND RESTRICTIONS

The payment of dividends by Pacific Life to Pacific LifeCorp is subject to restrictions set forth in the State of Nebraska insurance laws. These laws require (i) notification to the NE DOI for the declaration and payment of any dividend and (ii) approval by the NE DOI for accumulated dividends within the preceding twelve months that exceed the greater of 10% of statutory policyholder surplus as of the preceding December 31 or statutory net gain from operations for the preceding twelve months ended December 31. Generally, these restrictions pose no short-term liquidity concerns for Pacific LifeCorp. Based on these restrictions and 2011 statutory results, Pacific Life could pay $199 million in dividends in 2012 to Pacific LifeCorp without prior approval from the NE DOI, subject to the notification requirement.

During the years ended December 31, 2011 and 2010, Pacific Life paid cash dividends to Pacific LifeCorp of $125 million and $150 million, respectively. No dividends were paid during 2009. In March 2012, Pacific Life declared and paid a cash dividend to Pacific LifeCorp of $70 million.

The maximum amount of ordinary dividends that can be paid by PL&A to Pacific Life without restriction cannot exceed the lesser of 10% of statutory surplus as regards to policyholders, or the statutory net gain from operations. Based on this limitation and 2011 statutory results, PL&A could pay $30 million in dividends to Pacific Life in 2012 without prior regulatory approval. No dividends were paid during 2011, 2010 and 2009.

CLOSED BLOCK

In connection with the Conversion, an arrangement known as a closed block (the Closed Block) was established, for dividend purposes only, for the exclusive benefit of certain individual life insurance policies that had an experience based dividend scale for 1997. The Closed Block was designed to give reasonable assurance to holders of the Closed Block policies that policy dividends will not change solely as a result of the Conversion.

Assets that support the Closed Block, which are primarily included in fixed maturity securities and policy loans, amounted to $289 million and $284 million as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively. Liabilities allocated to the Closed Block, which are primarily included in future policy benefits, amounted to $301 million and $304 million as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively. The net contribution to income from the Closed Block was $1 million, zero and $4 million for the years ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009, respectively.

VARIABLE INTEREST ENTITIES

The Company evaluates its interests in VIEs on an ongoing basis and consolidates those VIEs in which it has a controlling financial interest and is thus deemed to be the primary beneficiary. A controlling financial interest has both of the following characteristics: (i) the power to direct the activities of the VIE that most significantly impact the VIE’s economic performance, and (ii) the obligation to absorb losses of the VIE that could potentially be significant to the VIE or the right to receive benefits from the VIE that could potentially be significant to the VIE. Creditors or beneficial interest holders of VIEs, where the Company is the primary beneficiary, have no recourse against the Company in the event of default by these VIEs.

PL-16

The following table presents, as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, the consolidated assets, consolidated liabilities and maximum exposure to loss relating to VIEs, which the Company (i) has consolidated because it is the primary beneficiary or (ii) total assets of and maximum exposure to loss relating to VIEs in which the Company holds a significant variable interest, but has not consolidated because it is not the primary beneficiary (In Millions):


	Primary Beneficiary						Not Primary Beneficiary
					Maximum				Maximum
	Consolidated		Consolidated		Exposure to		Total		Exposure to
	Assets		Liabilities		Loss		Assets		Loss

December 31, 2011:
Aircraft securitizations	$	2,070	$	1,466	$	604	$	282
Private equity funds		377		22		50
Asset-backed securities								1,910	$	105

Total	$	2,447	$	1,488	$	654	$	2,192	$	105

December 31, 2010:
Aircraft securitizations	$	2,364	$	1,975	$	389	$	320
Private equity funds		267		5		34
Asset-backed securities								1,910	$	108

Total	$	2,631	$	1,980	$	423	$	2,230	$	108

		AIRCRAFT SECURITIZATIONS

		ACG has sponsored three financial asset securitizations secured by interests in aircraft. ACG serves as the remarketing agent and provides various aircraft related services in all three securitizations for a fee. This fee is eliminated for the two consolidated securitizations and is included in other income as earned for the unconsolidated securitization.

		In 2005, ACG sponsored a securitization transaction whereby Aviation Capital Group Trust III (ACG Trust III) acquired 74 of ACG’s aircraft through a private placement note offering in the amount of $1,860 million. ACG owns 100% of the equity and has a controlling financial interest in this VIE. Therefore, ACG was determined to be the primary beneficiary of this VIE and ACG Trust III is consolidated into the consolidated financial statements of the Company. These private placement notes are the obligation of ACG Trust III and represent debt that is non-recourse to the Company (Note 13). VIE non-recourse debt consolidated from ACG Trust III was $795 million and $1,103 million as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively. As of December 31, 2011 and 2010, the maximum exposure to loss, based on the Company’s interest in ACG Trust III, was $397 million and $201 million, respectively.

		In 2003, ACG sponsored a securitization transaction whereby Aviation Capital Group Trust II (ACG Trust II) acquired 37 of ACG’s aircraft through a private placement note offering in the amount of $1,027 million. ACG owns 100% of the equity and has a controlling financial interest in this VIE. Therefore, ACG was determined to be the primary beneficiary of this VIE and ACG Trust II is consolidated into the consolidated financial statements of the Company. These private placement notes are the obligation of ACG Trust II and represent debt that is non-recourse to the Company (Note 13). VIE non-recourse debt consolidated from ACG Trust II was $335 million and $484 million as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively. As of December 31, 2011 and 2010, the maximum exposure to loss was $207 million and $188 million, respectively.

		In 2000, ACG sponsored a financial asset securitization of aircraft to Aviation Capital Group Trust (Aviation Trust). ACG and Pacific Life are beneficial interest holders in Aviation Trust. Aviation Trust is not consolidated as the Company is not the primary beneficiary as ACG does not have the obligation to absorb losses of Aviation Trust that could potentially be significant to Aviation Trust or the right to receive benefits from Aviation Trust that could potentially be significant to it. The carrying value is comprised of beneficial interests issued by Aviation Trust. As of December 31, 2011 and 2010, the maximum exposure to loss, based on carrying value, was zero.

		PRIVATE EQUITY FUNDS

		Private equity funds (the Funds) are limited partnerships that invest in private equity investments for outside investors, where the Company is the general partner. The Company provides investment management services to the Funds for a fee and receives

PL-17

carried interest based upon the performance of the Funds. The Funds are a VIE due to the purpose and design of the Funds and the lack of control by the other equity investors. The Company has determined itself to be the primary beneficiary since it has a controlling financial interest in the Funds and the Funds are consolidated into the consolidated financial statements of the Company. The Company has not guaranteed the performance, liquidity or obligations of the Funds, and the Company’s maximum exposure to loss is equal to the carrying amounts of its retained interest. VIE non-recourse debt consolidated from the Funds was $20 million and $5 million as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively (Note 13).

		ASSET-BACKED SECURITIES

		As part of the Company’s investment strategy, the Company purchases primarily investment grade beneficial interests issued from bankruptcy-remote special purpose entities (SPEs), which are collateralized by financial assets including corporate debt. The Company has not guaranteed the performance, liquidity or obligations of the SPEs, and the Company’s maximum exposure to loss is limited to its carrying value of the beneficial interests in the SPEs. The Company has no liabilities related to these VIEs. The Company has determined that it is not the primary beneficiary of these entities since it does not have the power to direct their financial activities. Therefore, the Company does not consolidate these entities. The investments are reported as fixed maturity securities available for sale and had a net carrying amount of $105 million and $108 million as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively. During the years ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009, the Company recorded OTTIs of zero, zero and $60 million, respectively, related to these securities.

		OTHER NON-CONSOLIDATED VIEs

		As part of normal investment activities, the Company will make passive investments in structured securities for which it is not the sponsor. These structured securities include residential mortgage-backed securities (RMBS), commercial mortgage-backed securities (CMBS), collateralized debt obligations, and other asset-backed securities which are reported in fixed maturities securities available for sale. For these investments, the Company determined it is not the primary beneficiary due to the relative size of the Company’s investment in comparison to the original amount issued by the VIEs. In addition, the Company does not have the authority to direct the activities of these VIEs that most significantly impact the VIEs economic performance. The Company’s maximum exposure to loss is limited to the amount of its investment. See Note 8 for the carrying amount and estimated fair value of these investments.

5.		BUSINESS ACQUISITIONS

		On August 31, 2011, Pacific Life and Pacific Life Reinsurance (Barbados) Limited (PLRB), a newly formed insurer and wholly owned subsidiary of Pacific LifeCorp, acquired Manulife Financial Corporation’s life retrocession business. The acquisition was structured utilizing five coinsurance transactions in which Pacific Life entered into three contracts covering the lives of U.S. persons and PLRB entered into two contracts covering non-U.S. persons. By operation of the five reinsurance transactions, Pacific Life and PLRB each obtained control of a business requiring the application of the acquisition accounting provisions of the Codification’s Business Combinations Topic.

		The acquisition allows Pacific Life to gain access to a large block of mortality-based business without adding significant concentration risk. The addition of this mortality risk helps Pacific Life diversify its overall risk profile by providing balance against the more volatile risks of equity, credit, and interest rates. The expectation is that the acquired retrocession business will also provide a platform to generate new business. For financial reporting purposes, the retrocession business is a component of the Company’s reinsurance segment.

		Ceding commissions in the form of non-cash consideration in connection with the acquisition of the U.S. life business by Pacific Life and the non-U.S. life business by PLRB was $198 million and $39 million, respectively. In anticipation of the acquisition, Pacific LifeCorp invested $120 million of capital in PLRB. Pacific Life and PLRB incurred acquisition-related costs of $6 million, which is included in operating and other expenses and capitalized $5 million of debt issuance cost, which is included in other assets.

		Pacific Life and PLRB are in the process of finalizing the fair value of the assets acquired and the liabilities assumed and therefore has not finalized the acquisition accounting required by U.S. GAAP. The valuation of the insurance reserves acquired and the identification and valuation of intangible assets are the most significant items requiring additional data and analysis before the valuation process is complete. Pacific Life and PLRB expect to finalize the acquisition accounting no later than the third quarter of 2012.

PL-18

The following table presents, as of December 31, 2011, the estimated fair value of the assets acquired and liabilities assumed on August 31, 2011:


	Pacific Life		PLRB		Combined
	(In Millions)
Assets acquired:
Cash	$	192	$	520	$	712
Value of business acquired ⁽¹⁾		72		12		84
Software computer applications ⁽²⁾		4				4
Other assets		4				4
Goodwill ⁽²⁾		6		70		76

Total assets	$	278	$	602	$	880


Liabilities assumed:
GAAP reserves ⁽³⁾	$	129	$	567	$	696
Other liabilities		149		35		184

Total liabilities	$	278	$	602	$	880


⁽¹⁾		Included in DAC

⁽²⁾		Included in other assets

⁽³⁾		Included in future policy benefits

		On July 28, 2011, Pacific Global Advisors LLC (PGA), a wholly owned subsidiary of Pacific Life, acquired JP Morgan Chase’s Pension Advisory Group. PGA’s target market is businesses and plan trustees managing employee defined benefit retirement plans. PGA’s expertise is in the delivery of advisory services concentrated in the areas of liability-driven investing, hedging, risk management, and actuarial services.

		This acquisition allows Pacific Life to strengthen its ability to deliver financial security solutions to retirement plans sponsors and trustees. PGA will also provide additional diversification to Pacific Life’s business mix.

		PGA paid approximately $45 million to acquire the pension advisory business. In anticipation of the acquisition, Pacific Life invested $48 million of capital in PGA. The Company incurred acquisition-related expense of $5 million, which is included in operating and other expenses.

		The Company is in the process of finalizing the fair value of the assets acquired and the liabilities assumed and therefore has not finalized the acquisition accounting required by U.S. GAAP. The identification and valuation of intangible assets is the most significant item requiring additional data and analysis before the valuation process is complete. The Company expects to finalize the acquisition accounting no later than the second quarter of 2012.

		The following table presents, as of December 31, 2011, the estimated fair value of the assets acquired and liabilities assumed on July 28, 2011 (In Millions):


Assets acquired:
Intangibles ⁽¹⁾	$	7
Goodwill ⁽¹⁾		38

Total assets	$	45


Liabilities assumed:
Other liabilities		—

Total liabilities		—


⁽¹⁾		Included in other assets

PL-19

6.		DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS

		The Company’s former broker-dealer operations have been reflected as discontinued operations in the Company’s consolidated financial statements. Discontinued operations do not include the operations of Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD), a wholly owned broker-dealer subsidiary of Pacific Life, which primarily serves as the underwriter/distributor of registered investment-related products and services, principally variable life and variable annuity contracts issued by the Company, and mutual funds. In March 2007, the Company classified its broker-dealer subsidiaries, other than PSD, as held for sale. During 2008 and 2007, these broker-dealers were sold.

		Operating results from the discontinued operations were as follows:


	Years Ended December 31,
	2011			2010		2009
	(In Millions)
Benefits and expenses	$	13				$	31

Loss from discontinued operations		(13	)		—		(31	)
Benefit from income taxes		(4	)				(11	)

Discontinued operations, net of taxes	$	(9	)		—	$	(20	)

7.		DEFERRED POLICY ACQUISITION COSTS

		Components of DAC are as follows:


	Years Ended December 31,
	2011			2010			2009
	(In Millions)
Balance, January 1	$	4,435		$	4,806		$	5,012

Cumulative pre-tax effect of adoption of new accounting principle (Note 1)								7

Additions:
Capitalized during the year		639			558			777

Amortization:
Allocated to commission expenses		274			(529	)		(446	)
Allocated to operating expenses		9			(145	)		(129	)

Total amortization		283			(674	)		(575	)
Allocated to OCI		(94	)		(255	)		(415	)

Balance, December 31	$	5,263		$	4,435		$	4,806

During the year ended December 31, 2011, negative AGPs resulted in an increase to the DAC asset of $618 million and negative DAC amortization through a decrease to commission expenses of $502 million and operating expenses of $116 million (Note 1). During the years ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009, the Company revised certain assumptions to develop EGPs for its products subject to DAC amortization. This resulted in a decrease in DAC amortization expense of $109 million for the year ended December 31, 2011 and increases in DAC amortization expense of $34 million and $23 million for the years ended December 31, 2010 and 2009, respectively. The revised EGPs also resulted in increased URR amortization of $35 million for the year ended December 31, 2011, increased URR amortization of $20 million for the year ended December 31, 2010 and an immaterial decrease in URR amortization for the year ended December 31, 2009. The capitalized sales inducement balance included in the DAC asset was $645 million and $549 million as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively.

PL-20

8.		INVESTMENTS

		The net carrying amount, gross unrealized gains and losses, and estimated fair value of fixed maturity and equity securities available for sale are shown below. The net carrying amount of fixed maturity securities represents amortized cost adjusted for OTTIs recognized in earnings and changes in the estimated fair value attributable to the hedged risk in a fair value hedge. The net carrying amount of equity securities represents cost adjusted for OTTIs. See Note 14 for information on the Company’s estimated fair value measurements and disclosure.


	Net
	Carrying		Gross Unrealized				Estimated
	Amount		Gains		Losses		Fair Value
	(In Millions)
December 31, 2011:
U.S. Treasury securities	$	27	$	8			$	35
Obligations of states and political subdivisions		1,064		117	$	2		1,179
Foreign governments		456		51		4		503
Corporate securities		19,468		2,210		186		21,492
RMBS		4,475		189		491		4,173
CMBS		740		37		6		771
Collateralized debt obligations		115		17		17		115
Other asset-backed securities		523		69		7		585

Total fixed maturity securities	$	26,868	$	2,698	$	713	$	28,853


Perpetual preferred securities	$	283	$	5	$	60	$	228
Other equity securities		74				1		73


Total equity securities	$	357	$	5	$	61	$	301


	Net
	Carrying		Gross Unrealized				Estimated
	Amount		Gains		Losses		Fair Value
	(In Millions)
December 31, 2010:
U.S. Treasury securities	$	914	$	21	$	15	$	920
Obligations of states and political subdivisions		954		15		44		925
Foreign governments		433		50		1		482
Corporate securities		18,454		1,421		207		19,668
RMBS		5,100		138		597		4,641
CMBS		972		50		11		1,011
Collateralized debt obligations		118		28		26		120
Other asset-backed securities		500		54		8		546

Total fixed maturity securities	$	27,445	$	1,777	$	909	$	28,313


Perpetual preferred securities	$	299	$	11	$	35	$	275
Other equity securities		4						4


Total equity securities	$	303	$	11	$	35	$	279

PL-21

		The Company has investments in perpetual preferred securities that are issued primarily by European banks. The net carrying amount and estimated fair value of the available for sale perpetual preferred securities was $372 million and $282 million, respectively, as of December 31, 2011. Included in these amounts are perpetual preferred securities carried in trusts with a net carrying amount and estimated fair value of $89 million and $54 million, respectively, that are held in fixed maturities and included in the tables above in corporate securities. Perpetual preferred securities reported as equity securities available for sale are presented in the tables above as perpetual preferred securities.

		The net carrying amount and estimated fair value of fixed maturity securities available for sale as of December 31, 2011, by contractual repayment date of principal, are shown below. Expected maturities may differ from contractual maturities as borrowers may have the right to call or prepay obligations with or without call or prepayment penalties.


	Net
	Carrying		Gross Unrealized				Estimated
	Amount		Gains		Losses		Fair Value
	(In Millions)
Due in one year or less	$	896	$	31	$	2	$	925
Due after one year through five years		5,570		428		41		5,957
Due after five years through ten years		8,805		895		99		9,601
Due after ten years		5,744		1,032		50		6,726

		21,015		2,386		192		23,209
Mortgage-backed and asset-backed securities		5,853		312		521		5,644

Total fixed maturity securities	$	26,868	$	2,698	$	713	$	28,853

PL-22

The following tables present the number of investments, estimated fair value and gross unrealized losses on investments where the estimated fair value has declined and remained continuously below the net carrying amount for less than twelve months and for twelve months or greater. Included in the tables are gross unrealized losses for fixed maturity securities available for sale and other securities, which include equity securities available for sale, cost method investments, and non-marketable equity securities.


	Total
					Gross
			Estimated		Unrealized
	Number		Fair Value		Losses
			(In Millions)
December 31, 2011:
Obligations of states and political subdivisions		4	$	71	$	2
Foreign governments		11		73		4
Corporate securities		314		2,183		186
RMBS		207		2,624		491
CMBS		10		77		6
Collateralized debt obligations		3		91		17
Other asset-backed securities		13		101		7

Total fixed maturity securities		562		5,220		713

Perpetual preferred securities		19		177		60
Other securities		12		89		5

Total other securities		31		266		65

Total		593	$	5,486	$	778


	Less than 12 Months						12 Months or Greater
					Gross						Gross
			Estimated		Unrealized				Estimated		Unrealized
	Number		Fair Value		Losses		Number		Fair Value		Losses
			(In Millions)						(In Millions)
December 31, 2011:
Obligations of states and political subdivisions								4	$	71	$	2
Foreign governments		11	$	73	$	4
Corporate securities		217		1,159		49		97		1,024		137
RMBS		49		401		14		158		2,223		477
CMBS		7		37		2		3		40		4
Collateralized debt obligations								3		91		17
Other asset-backed securities		8		89		6		5		12		1

Total fixed maturity securities		292		1,759		75		270		3,461		638

Perpetual preferred securities		8		57		6		11		120		54
Other securities		6		42		2		6		47		3

Total other securities		14		99		8		17		167		57

Total		306	$	1,858	$	83		287	$	3,628	$	695

PL-23


	Total
					Gross
			Estimated		Unrealized
	Number		Fair Value		Losses
			(In Millions)
December 31, 2010:
U.S. Treasury securities		3	$	429	$	15
Obligations of states and political subdivisions		44		612		44
Foreign governments		7		56		1
Corporate securities		350		3,161		207
RMBS		287		2,976		597
CMBS		21		141		11
Collateralized debt obligations		5		67		26
Other asset-backed securities		19		122		8

Total fixed maturity securities		736		7,564		909

Perpetual preferred securities		17		195		35
Other securities		29		112		16

Total other securities		46		307		51

Total		782	$	7,871	$	960


	Less than 12 Months						12 Months or Greater
					Gross						Gross
			Estimated		Unrealized				Estimated		Unrealized
	Number		Fair Value		Losses		Number		Fair Value		Losses
			(In Millions)						(In Millions)
December 31, 2010:
U.S. Treasury securities		3	$	429	$	15
Obligations of states and political subdivisions		32		374		16		12	$	238	$	28
Foreign governments		7		56		1
Corporate securities		241		1,926		66		109		1,235		141
RMBS		94		156		4		193		2,820		593
CMBS		15		52		2		6		89		9
Collateralized debt obligations								5		67		26
Other asset-backed securities		7		30		1		12		92		7

Total fixed maturity securities		399		3,023		105		337		4,541		804

Perpetual preferred securities								17		195		35
Other securities		3		17		1		26		95		15

Total other securities		3		17		1		43		290		50

Total		402	$	3,040	$	106		380	$	4,831	$	854

The Company has evaluated fixed maturity and other securities with gross unrealized losses and has determined that the unrealized losses are temporary. The Company does not intend to sell the securities and it is more likely than not that the Company will not be required to sell the securities before recovery of their net carrying amounts.

PL-24

The table below presents non-agency RMBS and CMBS by investment rating from independent rating agencies and vintage year of the underlying collateral as of December 31, 2011.


	Net				Rating as % of			Vintage Breakdown
	Carrying		Estimated		Net Carrying			2004 and												2008 and
Rating	Amount		Fair Value		Amount			Prior			2005			2006			2007			Thereafter
	($ In Millions)
Prime RMBS:
AAA	$	223	$	230		9	%		7	%											2	%
AA		91		93		3	%		3	%
A		119		117		5	%		4	%		1	%
BAA		95		95		4	%		3	%		1	%
BA and below		2,058		1,823		79	%		6	%		27	%		33	%		13	%

Total	$	2,586	$	2,358		100	%		23	%		29	%		33	%		13	%		2	%


Alt-A RMBS:
AAA	$	39	$	34		5	%		5	%
AA		23		23		3	%		1	%		1	%		1	%
A		3		3		1	%		1	%
BA and below		653		478		91	%		2	%		11	%		28	%		50	%

Total	$	718	$	538		100	%		9	%		12	%		29	%		50	%		0	%


Sub-prime RMBS:
AAA	$	17	$	16		5	%		5	%
A		28		27		8	%		8	%
BAA		72		67		20	%		20	%
BA and below		246		194		67	%		49	%		17	%					1	%

Total	$	363	$	304		100	%		82	%		17	%		0	%		1	%		0	%


CMBS:
AAA	$	573	$	593		77	%		34	%		1	%		1	%		21	%		20	%
AA		120		134		16	%		12	%											4	%
A		15		12		2	%		2	%
BAA		4		5		1	%														1	%
BA		28		27		4	%											4	%

Total	$	740	$	771		100	%		48	%		1	%		1	%		25	%		25	%

		Prime mortgages are loans made to borrowers with strong credit histories, whereas sub-prime mortgage lending is the origination of residential mortgage loans to borrowers with weak credit profiles. Alt-A mortgage lending is the origination of residential mortgage loans to customers who have good credit ratings, but have limited documentation for their source of income or some other standard input used to underwrite the mortgage loan. The slowing U.S. housing market, greater use of affordability mortgage products and relaxed underwriting standards by some originators for these loans has led to higher delinquency and loss rates, especially within the 2007 and 2006 vintage years.

		Pacific Life is a member of the Federal Home Loan Bank (FHLB) of Topeka. As of December 31, 2011, the Company has received advances of $1.0 billion from the FHLB of Topeka and has issued funding agreements to the FHLB of Topeka. The funding agreement liabilities are included in policyholder account balances. As of December 31, 2011, fixed maturity securities with an estimated fair value of $1.1 billion are in a custodial account pledged as collateral for the funding agreements. The Company is required to purchase stock in FHLB of Topeka each time it receives an advance. As of December 31, 2011, the Company holds $50 million of FHLB of Topeka stock, which has been restricted for sale and is recorded in other investments.

		PL&A is a member of FHLB of San Francisco. As of December 31, 2011, no assets are pledged as collateral. As of December 31, 2011, PL&A holds FHLB of San Francisco stock with an estimated fair value of $4 million, which has been restricted for sale and is recorded in other investments.

PL-25

		In connection with the acquired life retrocession business (Note 5), as of December 31, 2011, fixed maturity securities and cash and cash equivalents of $377 million and $12 million, respectively, have been pledged as collateral in reinsurance trusts.

		Major categories of investment income (loss) and related investment expense are summarized as follows:


	Years Ended December 31,
	2011		2010		2009
	(In Millions)
Fixed maturity securities	$	1,458	$	1,506	$	1,448
Equity securities		15		19		20
Mortgage loans		391		337		297
Real estate		107		93		92
Policy loans		204		214		229
Partnerships and joint ventures		163		119		(78	)
Other		16				12

Gross investment income		2,354		2,288		2,020
Investment expense		168		166		158

Net investment income	$	2,186	$	2,122	$	1,862

The components of net realized investment gain (loss) are as follows:


	Years Ended December 31,
	2011			2010			2009
	(In Millions)
Fixed maturity securities:
Gross gains on sales	$	113		$	167		$	42
Gross losses on sales		(16	)		(32	)		(18	)

Total fixed maturity securities		97			135			24


Equity securities:
Gross gains on sales		9			4
Gross losses on sales								(11	)

Total equity securities		9			4			(11	)


Non-marketable securities		34
Trading securities		(7	)		12			20
Real estate		5			21
Variable annuity GLB embedded derivatives		(1,191	)		185			2,211
Variable annuity GLB policy fees		197			208			147
Variable annuity derivatives — interest rate swaps								(104	)
Variable annuity derivatives — total return swaps		(366	)		(534	)		(1,542	)
Equity put options		135			(159	)		(672	)
Foreign currency and interest rate swaps		75			16			9
Forward starting interest rate swaps		299
Synthetic GIC policy fees		43			30			25
Other		9			(12	)		46

Total	$	(661	)	$	(94	)	$	153

PL-26

The table below presents gross unrealized losses on investments for which OTTI has been recognized in earnings in current or prior periods and gross unrealized losses on temporarily impaired investments for which no OTTI has been recognized.


	Gross Unrealized Losses
	OTTI		Non-OTTI
	Investments		Investments		Total
	(In Millions)
December 31, 2011:
Obligations of states and political subdivisions			$	2	$	2
Foreign governments				4		4
Corporate securities				186		186
RMBS	$	301		190		491
CMBS				6		6
Collateralized debt obligations		17				17
Other asset-backed securities				7		7

Total fixed maturity securities	$	318	$	395	$	713


Perpetual preferred securities			$	60	$	60
Other equity securities				1		1

Total equity securities		—	$	61	$	61


December 31, 2010:
U.S. Treasury securities			$	15	$	15
Obligations of states and political subdivisions				44		44
Foreign governments				1		1
Corporate securities				207		207
RMBS	$	308		289		597
CMBS				11		11
Collateralized debt obligations		26				26
Other asset-backed securities				8		8

Total fixed maturity securities	$	334	$	575	$	909


Perpetual preferred securities			$	35	$	35

Total equity securities		—	$	35	$	35

The change in unrealized gain (loss) on investments in available for sale and trading securities is as follows:


	Years Ended December 31,
	2011			2010		2009
	(In Millions)
Available for sale securities:
Fixed maturity	$	1,117		$	1,185	$	2,455
Equity		(32	)		23		124

Total available for sale securities	$	1,085		$	1,208	$	2,579


Trading securities	$	(12	)	$	14	$	26

PL-29

		Trading securities, included in other investments, totaled $215 million and $349 million as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively. The cumulative net unrealized gains on trading securities held as of December 31, 2011 and 2010 were $9 million and $21 million, respectively.

		As of December 31, 2011 and 2010, fixed maturity securities of $12 million were on deposit with state insurance departments to satisfy regulatory requirements.

		Mortgage loans totaled $7,599 million and $6,693 million as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively. Mortgage loans are collateralized by commercial properties primarily located throughout the U.S. As of December 31, 2011, $1,423 million, $1,250 million, $844 million, $657 million and $642 million were located in Washington, California, District of Columbia, Florida, and Texas, respectively. As of December 31, 2011, $382 million was located in Canada. The Company did not have any mortgage loans with accrued interest more than 180 days past due as of December 31, 2011 or 2010. As of December 31, 2011, there was no single mortgage loan investment that exceeded 10% of stockholder’s equity.

		As of December 31, 2011, there were three mortgage loans totaling $287 million that were considered impaired, and an impairment loss of $5 million was recorded as the underlying collateral of two of these mortgage loans was lower than the carrying amount and they were in the process of foreclosure. No impairment loss was recorded for the other mortgage loan since the estimated fair value of the collateral was greater than the carrying amount. As of December 31, 2010, one mortgage loan totaling $6 million was foreclosed upon. Since the estimated fair value of the collateral was greater than the carrying amount, no impairment loss was recorded.

		Real estate investments totaled $534 million and $547 million as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively. During the years ended December 31, 2011 and 2010, real estate investment write-downs totaled $1 million and $27 million, respectively. The Company had no real estate investment write-downs during the year ended December 31, 2009.

9.		AIRCRAFT LEASING PORTFOLIO, NET

		Aircraft leasing portfolio, net, consisted of the following:


	December 31,
	2011		2010
	(In Millions)
Aircraft	$	4,569	$	3,502
Aircraft consolidated from VIEs		2,613		2,938

		7,182		6,440
Accumulated depreciation		1,337		1,181

Aircraft leasing portfolio, net	$	5,845	$	5,259

As of December 31, 2011, domestic and foreign future minimum rentals scheduled to be received under the noncancelable portion of operating leases are as follows (In Millions):


	2012		2013		2014		2015		2016		Thereafter

Domestic	$	64	$	63	$	61	$	52	$	48	$	186
Foreign		537		435		379		306		248		489

Total operating leases	$	601	$	498	$	440	$	358	$	296	$	675

Included in the table above are three aircraft ACG has subleased to airlines with lease maturity dates of July 2021, March 2023 and April 2024 with total future rentals of $148 million. The revenue related to these aircraft, included in aircraft leasing revenue, was $11 million and $1 million for the years ended December 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively. There were no sublease revenues for the year ended December 31, 2009. These aircraft were sold to third-parties and subsequently leased back with lease maturity dates of March 2023 and December 2025. See Note 21 for the future lease commitments and minimum rentals to be received related to these sale leaseback transactions.

PL-30

		As of December 31, 2011 and 2010, aircraft with a carrying amount of $4,317 million and $4,802 million, respectively, were assigned as collateral to secure debt (Notes 4 and 13).

		During the years ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009, ACG recognized aircraft impairments of $15 million, $4 million and zero, respectively, which are included in operating and other expenses.

		The Company had four and five non-earning aircraft in the portfolio as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively.

		During the years ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009, ACG recognized pre-tax gains on the sale of aircraft of $33 million, $18 million and zero, respectively, which are included in other income. Aircraft held for sale totaled $6 million and $4 million as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively, and are included in aircraft leasing portfolio, net.

		See Note 21 for future aircraft purchase commitments.

10.		DERIVATIVES AND HEDGING ACTIVITIES

		The Company primarily utilizes derivative instruments to manage its exposure to interest rate risk, foreign currency risk, credit risk, and equity risk. Derivative instruments are also used to manage the duration mismatch of assets and liabilities. The Company utilizes a variety of derivative instruments including swaps and options. In addition, certain insurance products offered by the Company contain features that are accounted for as derivatives.

		Accounting for derivatives and hedging activities requires the Company to recognize all derivative instruments as either assets or liabilities at estimated fair value in its consolidated statement of financial condition. The Company applies hedge accounting by designating derivative instruments as either fair value or cash flow hedges on the date the Company enters into a derivative contract. The Company formally documents at inception all relationships between hedging instruments and hedged items, as well as its risk management objectives and strategy for undertaking various hedge transactions. In this documentation, the Company specifically identifies the asset, liability, firm commitment, or forecasted transaction that has been designated as a hedged item and states how the hedging instrument is expected to hedge the risks related to the hedged item. The Company formally assesses and measures effectiveness of its hedging relationships both at the hedge inception and on an ongoing basis in accordance with its risk management policy.

		The Company developed a pattern of forecasted transactions that did not occur as originally forecasted, and as a result, derivative instruments in the Company’s insurance operations previously designated as cash flow hedges should have been reported as derivatives not designated as hedging instruments during 2010. The impact of the discontinuance of cash flow hedge accounting was insignificant to the consolidated financial statements as of and for the year ended December 31, 2010, and therefore, the consolidated financial statements and footnote disclosures as of and for the year ended December 31, 2010 were not revised.

		DERIVATIVES NOT DESIGNATED AS HEDGING INSTRUMENTS

		The Company has certain insurance and reinsurance contracts that are considered to have embedded derivatives. When it is determined that the embedded derivative possesses economic and risk characteristics that are not clearly and closely related to those of the host contract, and that a separate instrument with the same terms would qualify as a derivative instrument, it is separated from the host contract and accounted for as a stand-alone derivative.

		The Company offers a rider on certain variable annuity contracts that guarantees net principal over a ten-year holding period, as well as riders on certain variable annuity contracts that guarantee a minimum withdrawal benefit over specified periods, subject to certain restrictions. These variable annuity GLBs are considered embedded derivatives and are recorded in future policy benefits.

		GLBs on variable annuity contracts issued between January 1, 2007 and March 31, 2009 are partially covered by reinsurance. These reinsurance arrangements are used to offset a portion of the Company’s exposure to the GLBs for the lives of the host variable annuity contracts issued. The ceded portion of the GLBs is considered an embedded derivative and is recorded as a component of net reinsurance recoverable in other assets.

		The Company employs hedging strategies (variable annuity derivatives) to mitigate equity risk associated with the GLBs not covered by reinsurance. The Company utilizes total return swaps based upon the S&P 500 Index (S&P 500) primarily to economically hedge the equity risk of the mortality and expense fees in its variable annuity products. These contracts provide periodic payments to the Company in exchange for the total return and changes in fair value of the S&P 500 in the form of a

PL-31

		payment or receipt, depending on whether the return relative to the index on trade date is positive or negative, respectively. Payments and receipts are recognized in net realized investment gain (loss).

		The Company also uses equity put options to hedge equity and credit risks. These equity put options involve the exchange of periodic fixed rate payments for the return, at the end of the option agreement, of the equity index below a specified strike price. Generally, no cash is exchanged at the outset of the contract and no principal payments are made by either party.

		The Company issues synthetic GICs to Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (ERISA) qualified defined contribution employee benefit plans (ERISA Plan). The ERISA Plan uses the contracts in its stable value fixed income option. The Company receives a fee for providing book value accounting for the ERISA Plan stable value fixed income option. The Company does not manage the assets underlying synthetic GICs. In the event that plan participant elections exceed the estimated fair value of the assets or if the contract is terminated and at the end of the termination period the book value under the contract exceeds the estimated fair value of the assets, then the Company is required to pay the ERISA Plan the difference between book value and estimated fair value. The Company mitigates the investment risk through pre-approval and monitoring of the investment guidelines, requiring high quality investments and adjustments to the plan crediting rates to compensate for unrealized losses in the portfolios.

		Financial futures contracts obligate the holder to buy or sell the underlying financial instrument at a specified future date for a set price and may be settled in cash or by delivery of the financial instrument. Price changes on futures are settled daily through the required margin cash flows. As part of its asset/liability management, the Company generally utilizes futures contracts to manage its interest rate and market risk related to bonds. Future contracts have limited off-balance sheet credit risk as they are executed on organized exchanges and require security deposits, as well as daily cash settlement of margins.

		The Company offers indexed universal life insurance products, which credit the price return of an underlying index to the policy cash value. A policyholder may allocate the policy’s net accumulated value to one or a combination of the following: fixed return account, one year S&P 500 indexed account capped at 13%, two year S&P 500 index account capped at 32%, five year S&P 500 indexed account, or one year global index account capped at 13%. The indexed products contain embedded derivatives and are recorded in policyholder account balances.

		The Company utilizes call options to hedge the credit paid to the policy on the underlying index. These options are contracts to buy the index at a predetermined time at a contracted price. The contracts will be net settled in cash based on differentials in the index at the time of exercise and the strike price and the settlements will be recognized in net realized investment gain (loss).

		Foreign currency interest rate swap agreements are used to convert a fixed or floating rate, foreign-denominated asset or liability to a U.S. dollar fixed rate asset or liability. The foreign currency interest rate swaps involve the exchange of an initial principal amount in two currencies and the agreement to re-exchange the currencies at a future date at an agreed exchange rate. There are also periodic exchanges of interest payments in the two currencies at specified intervals, calculated using agreed upon rates and the exchanged principal amounts. The main currencies that the Company hedges are the Euro, British Pound, and Canadian Dollar.

		Interest rate swap agreements are used to convert a floating rate asset or liability to a fixed rate to hedge the variability of cash flows of the hedged asset or liability due to changes in benchmark interest rates. These derivatives are predominantly used to better match the cash flow characteristics of certain assets and liabilities. These agreements involve the exchange, at specified intervals, of interest payments resulting from the difference between fixed rate and floating rate interest amounts calculated by reference to an underlying notional amount. Generally, no cash is exchanged at the outset of the contract and no principal payments are made by either party.

		Forward starting interest rate swaps are used to hedge the variability in the future interest receipts or payments stemming from the anticipated purchase of fixed rate securities or issuance of fixed rate liabilities due to changes in benchmark interest rates. These derivatives are predominantly used to lock in interest rate levels to match future cash flow characteristics of assets and liabilities. Forward starting interest rate swaps involve the exchange, at specified intervals, of interest payments resulting from the difference between fixed and floating rate interest amounts calculated by reference to an underlying notional amount to begin at a specified date in the future for a specified period of time. Generally, no cash is exchanged at the outset of the contract and no principal payments are made by either party. The notional amounts of the contracts do not represent future cash requirements, as the Company intends to close out open positions prior to their effective dates.

PL-32

The Company had the following outstanding derivatives not designated as hedging instruments:


	Notional Amount
	December 31,
	2011		2010
	(In Millions)
Variable annuity GLB embedded derivatives	$	38,960	$	37,147
Variable annuity GLB reinsurance contracts		14,744		15,117
Variable annuity derivatives — total return swaps		3,666		2,891
Equity put options		6,133		5,285
Synthetic GICs		21,593		22,402
Foreign currency and interest rate swaps		8,020		568
Forward starting interest rate swaps		1,140
Futures		1,400
Other		2,084		1,438

		Notional amount represents a standard of measurement of the volume of derivatives. Notional amount is not a quantification of market risk or credit risk and is not recorded in the consolidated statements of financial condition. Notional amounts generally represent those amounts used to calculate contractual cash flows to be exchanged and are not paid or received, except for certain contracts such as currency swaps.

		The following table summarizes amounts recognized in net realized investment gain (loss) for derivatives not designated as hedging instruments. Gains and losses include the changes in estimated fair value of the derivatives and amounts realized on terminations. The amounts presented do not include the periodic net payments of $418 million, $560 million and $1,476 million for the years ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009, respectively, which are recognized in net realized investment gain (loss).


	Amount of Gain (Loss)
	Recognized in
	Income on Derivatives
	Years Ended December 31,
	2011			2010			2009
	(In Millions)
Derivatives not designated as hedging instruments:
Variable annuity derivatives — interest rate swaps							$	(168	)
Variable annuity derivatives — total return swaps	$	(121	)	$	(84	)		(102	)
Equity put options		252			(60	)		(580	)
Foreign currency and interest rate swaps		170	⁽¹⁾					7
Forward starting interest rate swaps		281
Other		34			39			27
Embedded derivatives:
Variable annuity GLB embedded derivatives (including reinsurance contracts)		(1,191	)		185			2,211
Other		23			(23	)		(14	)

Total	$	(552	)	$	57		$	1,381


⁽¹⁾		Includes foreign currency transaction gains and (losses) for foreign currency interest rate swaps.

PL-33

		DERIVATIVES DESIGNATED AS CASH FLOW HEDGES

		The Company primarily uses foreign currency interest rate swaps, forward starting interest rate swaps and interest rate swaps to manage its exposure to variability in cash flows due to changes in foreign currencies and the benchmark interest rate. These cash flows include those associated with existing assets and liabilities, as well as the forecasted interest cash flows related to anticipated investment purchases and liability issuances. Such anticipated cash flows in the non-insurance company operations are considered probable to occur and are generally completed within 24 years of the inception of the hedge.

		When a derivative is designated as a cash flow hedge, the effective portion of changes in the estimated fair value of the derivative is recognized in OCI and reclassified to earnings when the hedged item affects earnings, and the ineffective portion of changes in the estimated fair value of the derivative is recognized in net realized investment gain (loss). For the years ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009, hedge ineffectiveness related to designated cash flow hedges reflected in net realized investment gain (loss) was immaterial.

		For the year ended December 31, 2011, the Company reclassified a gain, net of tax, of $12 million from accumulated other comprehensive income (loss) (AOCI) to earnings resulting from the discontinuance of cash flow hedges due to forecasted transactions that were no longer probable of occurring. Amounts reclassified from AOCI to earnings resulting from the discontinuance of cash flow hedges due to forecasted cash flows that were no longer probable of occurring for the years ended December 31, 2010 and 2009 were immaterial. Over the next twelve months, the Company anticipates that $12 million of deferred losses, net of tax, on derivative instruments in AOCI will be reclassified to earnings consistent with when the hedged forecasted transaction affects earnings. For the year ended December 31, 2011, all of the non-insurance company operation’s (primarily ACG) hedged forecasted transactions for outstanding cash flow hedges were determined to be probable of occurring.

		The Company had the following outstanding derivatives designated as cash flow hedges:


	Notional Amount
	December 31,
	2011		2010
	(In Millions)
Foreign currency and interest rate swaps	$	1,531	$	7,644
Forward starting interest rate swaps				1,140

The following table summarizes amounts recognized in OCI for changes in estimated fair value for derivatives designated as cash flow hedges. The amounts presented do not include the periodic net settlements of the derivatives.


	Gain (Loss)
	Recognized in
	OCI on Derivatives
	(Effective Portion)
	Years Ended December 31,
	2011		2010			2009
	(In Millions)
Derivatives in cash flow hedges:
Foreign currency and interest rate swaps	$	5	$	(14	)	$	108
Forward starting interest rate swaps				29			(254	)

Total	$	5	$	15		$	(146	)

		DERIVATIVES DESIGNATED AS FAIR VALUE HEDGES

		Interest rate swap agreements are used to convert a U.S. dollar denominated fixed rate asset or liability to a floating U.S. dollar denominated rate to hedge the changes in estimated fair value of the hedged asset or liability due to changes in benchmark interest rates. These derivatives are used primarily to closely match the duration of the assets supporting specific liabilities. Pacific Life also used interest rate swaps to convert fixed rate surplus notes to variable notes (Note 13). The Company had outstanding

PL-34

derivatives designated as fair value hedges with notional amounts for foreign currency and interest rate swaps of zero and $1,592 million as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively.

The following table summarizes amounts recognized in net realized investment gain (loss) for derivatives designated as fair value hedges. Gains and losses include the changes in estimated fair value of the derivatives as well as the offsetting gain or loss on the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk. The Company includes the gain or loss on the derivative in the same line item as the offsetting gain or loss on the hedged item. The amounts presented do not include the periodic net settlements of the derivatives or the income (expense) related to the hedged item.


	Gain (Loss)						Gain (Loss)
	Recognized in						Recognized in
	Income on Derivatives						Income on Hedged Items
	Years Ended December 31,						Years Ended December 31,
	2011		2010		2009		2011			2010			2009
	(In Millions)						(In Millions)
Derivatives in fair value hedges:
Interest rate swaps	$	328	$	85	$	97	$	(334	)	$	(98	)	$	(93	)

Total	$	328	$	85	$	97	$	(334	)	$	(98	)	$	(93	)

		For the years ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009, hedge ineffectiveness related to designated fair value hedges reflected in net realized investment gain (loss) was ($6) million, ($13) million and $4 million, respectively. No component of the hedging instrument’s estimated fair value is excluded from the determination of effectiveness.

		CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENT IMPACT

		Derivative instruments are recorded on the Company’s consolidated statements of financial condition at estimated fair value and are presented as assets or liabilities determined by calculating the net position for each derivative counterparty by legal entity, taking into account income accruals and net cash collateral.

PL-35

The following table summarizes the gross asset or liability derivative estimated fair value and excludes the impact of offsetting asset and liability positions held with the same counterparty, cash collateral payables and receivables and income accruals. See Note 14.


	Asset Derivatives					Liability Derivatives
	Estimated Fair Value					Estimated Fair Value
	December 31,					December 31,
	2011		2010			2011		2010
	(In Millions)					(In Millions)
Derivatives designated as hedging instruments:
Foreign currency and interest rate swaps			$	326	⁽¹⁾			$	308	⁽¹⁾
				18	⁽⁵⁾	$	111		326	⁽⁵⁾
Forward starting interest rate swaps				51	⁽¹⁾				1	⁽¹⁾
				20	⁽⁵⁾

Total derivatives designated as hedging instruments		—		415			111		635


Derivatives not designated as hedging instruments:
Variable annuity derivatives — total return swaps	$	1			⁽¹⁾		63		41	⁽¹⁾
							2		33	⁽⁵⁾
Equity put options		543		254	⁽¹⁾		2		15	⁽¹⁾
				33	⁽⁵⁾				13	⁽⁵⁾
Foreign currency and interest rate swaps		332		30	⁽¹⁾		242		4	⁽¹⁾
		8		1	⁽⁵⁾		104			⁽⁵⁾
Forward starting interest rate swaps		293			⁽¹⁾
		29			⁽⁵⁾
Other		35		29	⁽¹⁾		29		23	⁽¹⁾
		2		15	⁽⁵⁾
Embedded derivatives:
Variable annuity GLB embedded derivatives (including reinsurance contracts)		230		25	⁽²⁾		1,938		542	⁽³⁾
Other							67		76	⁽⁴⁾

Total derivatives not designated as hedging instruments		1,473		387			2,447		747

Total derivatives	$	1,473	$	802		$	2,558	$	1,382


		Location on the consolidated statements of financial condition:

⁽¹⁾		Other investments

⁽²⁾		Other assets

⁽³⁾		Future policy benefits

⁽⁴⁾		Policyholder account balances

⁽⁵⁾		Other liabilities

		Cash collateral received from counterparties was $658 million and $251 million as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively. This unrestricted cash collateral is included in cash and cash equivalents and the obligation to return it is netted against the estimated fair value of derivatives in other investments or other liabilities. Cash collateral pledged to counterparties was $36 million and $145 million as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively. A receivable representing the right to call this collateral back from the counterparty is netted against the estimated fair value of derivatives in other investments or other liabilities. If the net estimated fair value of the exposure to the counterparty is positive, the amount is reflected in other investments, whereas, if the net estimated fair value of the exposure to the counterparty is negative, the estimated fair value is included in other liabilities.

		As of December 31, 2011 and 2010, the Company had also accepted collateral consisting of various securities with an estimated fair value of $77 million and $36 million, respectively, which are held in separate custodial accounts. The Company is permitted by contract to sell or repledge this collateral and as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, none of the collateral had been repledged. As of December 31, 2011 and 2010, the Company provided collateral in the form of various securities with an estimated fair value of $1 million and $15 million, respectively, which are included in fixed maturity securities. The counterparties are permitted by contract to sell or repledge this collateral.

PL-36

		CREDIT EXPOSURE AND CREDIT RISK RELATED CONTINGENT FEATURES

		Credit exposure is measured on a counterparty basis as the net positive aggregate estimated fair value, net of collateral received, if any. The credit exposure for over the counter derivatives as of December 31, 2011 was $137 million. The maximum exposure to any single counterparty was $21 million at December 31, 2011.

		For all derivative contracts, excluding embedded derivative contracts such as variable annuity GLBs and synthetic GICs, the Company enters into master agreements that may include a termination event clause associated with financial strength ratings assigned by certain independent rating agencies. If these financial strength ratings were to fall below a specified level, as defined within each counterparty master agreement or, in most cases, if one of the rating agencies ceased to provide a financial strength rating, the counterparty could terminate the master agreement with payment due based on the estimated fair value of the underlying derivatives. As of December 31, 2011, the Company’s financial strength ratings were above the specified level.

		The Company enters into collateral arrangements with derivative counterparties, which require both the pledge and acceptance of collateral when the net estimated fair value of the underlying derivatives reaches a pre-determined threshold. Certain of these arrangements include credit-contingent provisions that provide for a reduction of these thresholds in the event of downgrades in the credit ratings of the Company and/or the counterparty. If these financial strength ratings were to fall below a specific investment grade credit rating, the counterparties to the derivative instruments could request immediate and ongoing full collateralization on derivative instruments in net liability positions. The aggregate estimated fair value of all derivative instruments with credit risk related contingent features that are in a liability position on December 31, 2011, is $81 million for which the Company has posted collateral of $36 million in the normal course of business. If certain of the Company’s financial strength ratings were to fall one notch as of December 31, 2011, the Company would have been required to post an additional $15 million of collateral to its counterparties.

		The Company attempts to limit its credit exposure by dealing with creditworthy counterparties, establishing risk control limits, executing legally enforceable master netting agreements, and obtaining collateral where appropriate. In addition, each counterparty is reviewed to evaluate its financial stability before entering into each agreement and throughout the period that the financial instrument is owned. All of the Company’s credit exposure from derivative contracts is with investment grade counterparties.

11.		POLICYHOLDER LIABILITIES

		POLICYHOLDER ACCOUNT BALANCES

		The detail of the liability for policyholder account balances is as follows:


	December 31,
	2011		2010

	(In Millions)
UL	$	20,941	$	20,098
Annuity and deposit liabilities		9,162		8,335
Funding agreements		3,178		4,618
GICs		1,111		2,025

Total	$	34,392	$	35,076

PL-37

		FUTURE POLICY BENEFITS

		The detail of the liability for future policy benefits is as follows:


	December 31,
	2011		2010

	(In Millions)
Annuity reserves	$	5,572	$	4,926
Variable annuity GLB embedded derivatives		1,936		542
Policy benefits payable		741		363
Life insurance		591		411
Closed Block liabilities		300		303
URR		289		510
Other		38		25

Total	$	9,467	$	7,080

12.		SEPARATE ACCOUNTS AND VARIABLE ANNUITY GUARANTEED BENEFIT FEATURES

		The Company issues variable annuity contracts through separate accounts for which investment income and investment gains and losses accrue directly to, and investment risk is borne by, the contract holder (traditional variable annuities). These contracts also include various types of GMDB and GLB features. For a discussion of certain GLBs accounted for as embedded derivatives, see Note 10.

		The GMDBs provide a specified minimum return upon death. Many of these death benefits are spousal, whereby a death benefit will be paid upon death of the first spouse. The survivor has the option to terminate the contract or continue it and have the death benefit paid into the contract and a second death benefit paid upon the survivor’s death. The GMDB features include those where the Company contractually guarantees to the contract holder either (a) return of no less than total deposits made to the contract less any partial withdrawals (return of net deposits), (b) the highest contract value on any contract anniversary date through age 80 minus any payments or withdrawals following the contract anniversary (anniversary contract value), or (c) the highest of contract value on certain specified dates or total deposits made to the contract less any partial withdrawals plus a minimum return (minimum return).

		The guaranteed minimum income benefit (GMIB) is a GLB that provides the contract holder with a guaranteed annuitization value after 10 years. Annuitization value is generally based on deposits adjusted for withdrawals plus a minimum return. In general, the GMIB requires contract holders to invest in an approved asset allocation strategy.

		In 2011, the Company began offering variable annuity contracts with guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefits for life (GMWBL) features. The GMWBL is a GLB that provides, subject to certain restrictions, a percentage of a contract holder’s guaranteed payment base will be available for withdrawal for life starting at age 59.5, regardless of market performance. The rider terminates upon death of the contract holder or their spouse if a spousal form of the rider is purchased. Outstanding GMWBL features were not significant at December 31, 2011.

PL-38

Information in the event of death on the various GMDB features outstanding was as follows (the Company’s variable annuity contracts with guarantees may offer more than one type of guarantee in each contract; therefore, the amounts listed are not mutually exclusive):


	December 31,
	2011		2010

	($ In Millions)
Return of net deposits
Separate account value	$	45,720	$	49,673
Net amount at risk ⁽¹⁾		2,311		1,738
Average attained age of contract holders	63 years		61 years

Anniversary contract value
Separate account value	$	14,832	$	16,814
Net amount at risk ⁽¹⁾		1,664		1,299
Average attained age of contract holders	64 years		62 years

Minimum return
Separate account value	$	1,040	$	1,211
Net amount at risk ⁽¹⁾		555		505
Average attained age of contract holders	67 years		65 years


⁽¹⁾		Represents the amount of death benefit in excess of the current account balance as of December 31.

Information regarding GMIB features outstanding is as follows:


	December 31,
	2011		2010

	($ In Millions)
Separate account value	$	2,345	$	2,744
Average attained age of contract holders	59 years		57 years

The determination of GMDB and GMIB liabilities is based on models that involve a range of scenarios and assumptions, including those regarding expected market rates of return and volatility, contract surrender rates and mortality experience. The following table summarizes the GMDB and GMIB liabilities, which are recorded in future policy benefits, and changes in these liabilities, which are reflected in policy benefits paid or provided:


	December 31,						December 31,
	2011			2010			2011			2010

	GMDB						GMIB

	(In Millions)						(In Millions)
Balance, beginning of year							$	43		$	38
Changes in reserves	$	26		$	42			39			14
Benefits paid		(26	)		(42	)		(4	)		(9	)

Balance, end of year		—			—		$	78		$	43

PL-39

Variable annuity contracts with guarantees were invested in separate account investment options as follows:


	December 31,
	2011		2010

	(In Millions)
Asset type
Domestic equity	$	22,908	$	26,290
International equity		6,272		6,447
Bonds		16,137		16,484
Money market		403		452

Total separate account value	$	45,720	$	49,673

13.		DEBT

		Debt consists of the following:


	December 31,
	2011		2010

	(In Millions)
Long-term debt:
Surplus notes	$	1,600	$	1,600
Deferred gains from derivative hedging activities		417
Fair value adjustment for derivative hedging activities				84
Non-recourse long-term debt:
Debt recourse only to ACG		3,332		2,499
ACG non-recourse debt		550		621
Other non-recourse debt		103		120
ACG VIE debt (Note 4)		1,130		1,587
Other VIE debt (Note 4)		20		5

Total long-term debt	$	7,152	$	6,516

		SHORT-TERM DEBT

		Pacific Life maintains a $700 million commercial paper program. There was no commercial paper debt outstanding as of December 31, 2011 and 2010. Pacific Life replaced a bank revolving credit facility of $400 million in November 2011 that was scheduled to mature in 2012 and served as a back-up line of credit for the commercial paper program, with a new bank revolving credit facility of $400 million maturing in November 2016 that will serve as a back-up line of credit to the commercial paper program. These facilities had no debt outstanding as of December 31, 2011 and 2010. As of and during the year ended December 31, 2011, Pacific Life was in compliance with the debt covenants related to these facilities.

		PL&A maintains reverse repurchase lines of credit with various financial institutions. These borrowings are at variable rates of interest based on collateral and market conditions. There was no debt outstanding in connection with these lines of credit as of December 31, 2011 and 2010.

		Pacific Life has approval from the FHLB of Topeka to receive advances up to 40% of Pacific Life’s statutory general account assets provided it has available collateral and is in compliance with debt covenant restrictions and insurance laws and regulations. There was no debt outstanding with the FHLB of Topeka as of December 31, 2011 and 2010. The Company had no additional funding capacity from eligible collateral as of December 31, 2011 and 2010.

PL-40

		PL&A is eligible to borrow from the FHLB of San Francisco amounts based on a percentage of statutory capital and surplus and could borrow up to amounts of $121 million. Of this amount, half, or $60.5 million, can be borrowed for terms other than overnight, out to a maximum term of nine months. These borrowings are at variable rates of interest, collateralized by certain mortgage loan and government securities. As of December 31, 2011 and 2010, PL&A had no debt outstanding with the FHLB of San Francisco.

		ACG has a revolving credit agreement with a bank for a $200 million borrowing facility. Interest is at variable rates and the facility matures in October 2013. There was no debt outstanding in connection with this revolving credit agreement as of December 31, 2011 and 2010. This credit facility is recourse only to ACG.

		LONG-TERM DEBT

		In June 2009, Pacific Life issued $1.0 billion of surplus notes at a fixed interest rate of 9.25%, maturing on June 15, 2039. Interest is payable semiannually on June 15 and December 15. Pacific Life may redeem the 9.25% surplus notes at its option, subject to the approval of the Nebraska Director of Insurance for such optional redemption. The 9.25% surplus notes are unsecured and subordinated to all present and future senior indebtedness and policy claims of Pacific Life. All future payments of interest and principal on the 9.25% surplus notes can be made only with the prior approval of the Nebraska Director of Insurance. The Company entered into interest rate swaps converting the 9.25% surplus notes to variable rate notes based upon the London InterBank Offered Rate (LIBOR). The interest rate swaps were designated as fair value hedges of these surplus notes and the changes in fair value of the hedged surplus notes associated with changes in interest rates were reflected as an adjustment to their carrying amount. This fair value adjustment to the carrying amount of the 9.25% surplus notes, which increased long-term debt by $53 million as of December 31, 2010 was offset by an estimated fair value adjustment which was also recorded for the interest rate swap derivative instruments. During the year ended December 31, 2011, the interest rate swaps were terminated and the fair value adjustment as of the termination date which increased the carrying value by $364 million will be amortized over the remaining life of the surplus notes using the effective interest method. Total unamortized deferred gains are $362 million as of December 31, 2011.

		Pacific Life has $150 million of surplus notes outstanding at a fixed interest rate of 7.9%, maturing on December 30, 2023. Interest is payable semiannually on June 30 and December 30. The 7.9% surplus notes may not be redeemed at the option of Pacific Life or any holder of the surplus notes. The 7.9% surplus notes are unsecured and subordinated to all present and future senior indebtedness and policy claims of Pacific Life. All future payments of interest and principal on the 7.9% surplus notes can be made only with the prior approval of the Nebraska Director of Insurance. The Company entered into interest rate swaps converting these surplus notes to variable rate notes based upon the LIBOR. The interest rate swaps were designated as fair value hedges of these surplus notes and the changes in estimated fair value of the hedged surplus notes associated with changes in interest rates were reflected as an adjustment to their carrying amount. This fair value adjustment to the carrying amount of the 7.9% surplus notes, which increased long-term debt by $31 million as of December 31, 2010 was offset by an estimated fair value adjustment which was also recorded for the interest rate swap derivative instruments. During the year ended December 31, 2011, the interest rate swaps were terminated and the fair value adjustment as of the termination date which increased the carrying value by $56 million will be amortized over the remaining life of the surplus notes using the effective interest method. Total unamortized deferred gains are $55 million as of December 31, 2011.

		In March 2010, the Nebraska Director of Insurance approved the issuance of an internal surplus note by Pacific Life to Pacific LifeCorp for $450 million. Pacific Life is required to pay Pacific LifeCorp interest on the internal surplus note semiannually on February 5 and August 5 at a fixed annual rate of 6.0%. All future payments of interest and principal on the internal surplus note can be made only with the prior approval of the Nebraska Director of Insurance. The internal surplus note matures on February 5, 2020.

		ACG enters into various secured loans that are guaranteed by the U.S. Export-Import bank or by the European Export Credit Agencies. Interest on these loans is payable quarterly and ranged from 0.7% to 4.4% as of December 31, 2011 and from 0.4% to 4.5% as of December 31, 2010. As of December 31, 2011, $1,455 million was outstanding on these loans with maturities ranging from 2014 to 2023. Principal payments due over the next twelve months are $120 million. As of December 31, 2010, $1,524 million was outstanding on these loans. These loans are recourse only to ACG.

		ACG enters into various senior unsecured loans with third-parties. Interest on these loans is payable monthly, quarterly or semi-annually and ranged from 2.0% to 7.2% as of December 31, 2011 and from 5.7% to 7.2% as of December 31, 2010. As of December 31, 2011, $1,813 million was outstanding on these loans with maturities ranging from 2012 to 2021. Principal payments over the next twelve months are $120 million. As of December 31, 2010, $975 million was outstanding on these loans. These loans are recourse only to ACG.

PL-41

		ACG enters into various secured bank loans to finance aircraft orders and deposits. Interest on these loans is payable monthly and was 2.0% as of December 31, 2011. As of December 31, 2011, $64 million was outstanding on these loans with maturities ranging from 2012 to 2013. Principal payments due over the next twelve months are $47 million. As of December 31, 2010, there was no amount outstanding on these loans. These loans are recourse only to ACG.

		ACG enters into various acquisition facilities and bank loans to acquire aircraft. Interest on these facilities and loans accrues at variable rates, is payable monthly and ranged from 2.8% to 3.3% as of December 31, 2011 and from 1.6% to 3.3% as of December 31, 2010. As of December 31, 2011, $550 million was outstanding on these facilities and loans with maturities ranging from 2013 to 2014. As of December 31, 2010, $621 million was outstanding on these facilities and loans. These facilities and loans are non-recourse to the Company.

		Certain subsidiaries of Pacific Asset Holding LLC, a wholly owned subsidiary of Pacific Life, entered into various real estate property related loans with various third-parties. Interest on these loans accrues at fixed and variable rates and is payable monthly. Fixed rates ranged from 3.6% to 5.4% as of December 31, 2011 and ranged from 5.8% to 6.2% as of December 31, 2010. Variable rates ranged from 1.5% to 4.0% as of December 31, 2011 and 1.4% to 2.0% as of December 31, 2010. As of December 31, 2011, there was $103 million outstanding on these loans with maturities ranging from 2012 to 2017. Principal payments due over the next twelve months are $54 million. As of December 31, 2010, there was $120 million outstanding on these loans. During the year ended December 31, 2011, one of these loans totaling $32 million was returned in foreclosure. All of these loans are secured by real estate properties and are non-recourse to the Company.

14.		ESTIMATED FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

		The Codification’s Fair Value Measurements and Disclosures Topic establishes a hierarchy that prioritizes the inputs of valuation methods used to measure estimated fair value for financial assets and financial liabilities that are carried at estimated fair value. The hierarchy consists of the following three levels that are prioritized based on observable and unobservable inputs.

	Level 1		Unadjusted quoted prices for identical instruments in active markets. Level 1 financial instruments would include securities that are traded in an active exchange market.

	Level 2		Observable inputs other than Level 1 prices, such as quoted prices for similar instruments in active markets; quoted prices for identical or similar instruments in inactive markets; and model-derived valuations for which all significant inputs are observable market data. Level 2 instruments include most fixed maturity securities that are valued by models using inputs that are derived principally from or corroborated by observable market data.

	Level 3		Valuations derived from valuation techniques in which one or more significant inputs are unobservable. Level 3 instruments include less liquid securities for which significant inputs are not observable in the market, such as certain structured securities and variable annuity GLB embedded derivatives that require significant management assumptions or estimation in the fair value measurement.

This hierarchy requires the use of observable market data when available.

PL-42

The following tables present, by estimated fair value hierarchy level, the Company’s financial assets and liabilities that are carried at estimated fair value as of December 31, 2011 and 2010.


							Gross
							Derivatives
							Estimated		Netting
	Level 1		Level 2		Level 3		Fair Value		Adjustments ⁽¹⁾			Total

	(In Millions)
December 31, 2011:
Assets:
U.S. Treasury securities			$	35								$	35
Obligations of states and political subdivisions				1,170	$	9							1,179
Foreign governments				422		81							503
Corporate securities				19,875		1,617							21,492
RMBS				3,137		1,036							4,173
CMBS				520		251							771
Collateralized debt obligations				4		111							115
Other asset-backed securities				289		296							585

Total fixed maturity securities		—		25,452		3,401							28,853


Perpetual preferred securities				202		26							228
Other equity securities	$	73											73

Total equity securities		73		202		26							301


Trading securities		89		91		35							215
Other investments						54							54
Derivatives:
Foreign currency and interest rate swaps				340			$	340	$	(250	)		90
Forward starting interest rate swaps				322				322		(29	)		293
Equity derivatives						544		544		(65	)		479
Embedded derivatives						230		230					230
Other				4		33		37		(31	)		6

Total derivatives		—		666		807		1,473		(375	)		1,098


Separate account assets ⁽²⁾		51,184		128		113							51,425

Total	$	51,346	$	26,539	$	4,436	$	1,473	$	(375	)	$	81,946


Liabilities:
Derivatives:
Foreign currency and interest rate swaps			$	457			$	457	$	(250	)	$	207
Forward starting interest rate swaps										(29	)		(29	)
Equity derivatives					$	67		67		(65	)		2
Embedded derivatives						2,005		2,005					2,005
Other				1		28		29		(31	)		(2	)

Total		—	$	458	$	2,100	$	2,558	$	(375	)	$	2,183

PL-43


							Gross
							Derivatives
							Estimated		Netting
	Level 1		Level 2		Level 3		Fair Value		Adjustments ⁽¹⁾			Total

	(In Millions)
December 31, 2010:
Assets:
U.S. Treasury securities			$	920								$	920
Obligations of states and political subdivisions				886	$	39							925
Foreign governments				412		70							482
Corporate securities				18,040		1,628							19,668
RMBS				3,573		1,068							4,641
CMBS				757		254							1,011
Collateralized debt obligations				5		115							120
Other asset-backed securities				266		280							546

Total fixed maturity securities		—		24,859		3,454							28,313


Perpetual preferred securities				263		12							275
Other equity securities	$	3				1							4

Total equity securities		3		263		13							279


Trading securities		91		192		66							349
Other investments						173							173
Derivatives:
Foreign currency and interest rate swaps				371		4	$	375	$	(331	)		44
Forward starting interest rate swaps				71				71		(21	)		50
Equity derivatives						287		287		(89	)		198
Embedded derivatives						25		25					25
Other				4		40		44		(38	)		6

Total derivatives		—		446		356		802		(479	)		323


Separate account assets ⁽²⁾		55,438		123		100							55,661

Total	$	55,532	$	25,883	$	4,162	$	802	$	(479	)	$	85,098


Liabilities:
Derivatives:
Foreign currency and interest rate swaps			$	638			$	638	$	(331	)	$	307
Forward starting interest rate swaps				1				1		(21	)		(20	)
Equity derivatives					$	102		102		(89	)		13
Embedded derivatives						618		618					618
Other						23		23		(38	)		(15	)

Total		—	$	639	$	743	$	1,382	$	(479	)	$	903


⁽¹⁾		Netting adjustments represent the impact of offsetting asset and liability positions on the consolidated statement of financial condition held with the same counterparty as permitted by guidance for offsetting in the Codification’s Derivatives and Hedging Topic.

⁽²⁾		Separate account assets are measured at estimated fair value. Investment performance related to separate account assets is offset by corresponding amounts credited to contract holders whose liability is reflected in the separate account liabilities. Separate account liabilities are measured to equal the estimated fair value of separate account assets as prescribed by guidance

PL-44


		in the Codification’s Financial Services — Insurance Topic for accounting and reporting of certain non traditional long-duration contracts and separate accounts. Separate account assets as presented in the tables above differ from the amounts presented in the consolidated statements of financial condition because cash and receivables for securities, and investment income due and accrued are not subject to the guidance under the Codification’s Fair Value Measurements and Disclosures Topic.

		ESTIMATED FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENT

		The Codification’s Fair Value Measurements and Disclosures Topic defines estimated fair value as the price that would be received to sell the asset or paid to transfer the liability at the measurement date. This “exit price” notion is a market-based measurement that requires a focus on the value that market participants would assign for an asset or liability.

		The following section describes the valuation methodologies used by the Company to measure various types of financial instruments at estimated fair value.

		FIXED MATURITY, EQUITY AND TRADING SECURITIES

		The estimated fair values of fixed maturity securities available for sale, equity securities available for sale and trading securities are determined by management after considering external pricing sources and internal valuation techniques.

		For securities with sufficient trading volume, prices are obtained from third-party pricing services. For structured or complex securities that are traded infrequently, estimated fair values are determined after evaluating prices obtained from third-party pricing services and independent brokers or are valued internally using various valuation techniques. Such techniques include matrix model pricing and internally developed models, which incorporate observable market data, where available. Matrix model pricing measures estimated fair value using cash flows, which are discounted using observable market yield curves provided by a major independent data service. The matrix model determines the discount yield based upon significant factors that include the security’s weighted average life and rating.

		Where matrix model pricing is not used, particularly for RMBS and other asset-backed securities, estimated fair values are determined by evaluating prices from third-party pricing services and independent brokers or other internally derived valuation models are utilized. The inputs used to measure estimated fair value in the internal valuations include, but are not limited to, benchmark yields, issuer spreads, bids, offers, reported trades, and estimated projected cash flows that incorporate significant inputs such as defaults and delinquency rates, severity, subordination, vintage and prepayment speeds.

		Prices obtained from independent third-parties are generally evaluated based on the inputs indicated above. The Company’s management analyzes and evaluates these prices and determines whether they are reasonable estimates of fair value. Management’s analysis may include, but is not limited to, review of third-party pricing methodologies and inputs, analysis of recent trades, and development of internal models utilizing observable market data of comparable securities. Based on this analysis, prices received from third-parties may be adjusted if the Company determines that there is a more appropriate estimated fair value based on available market information.

		Most securities priced by a major independent third-party service have been classified as Level 2, as management has verified that the inputs used in determining their estimated fair values are market observable and appropriate. Other externally priced securities for which estimated fair value measurement inputs are not sufficiently transparent, such as securities valued based on broker quotations, have been classified as Level 3. Internally valued securities, including adjusted prices received from independent third-parties, where significant management assumptions have been utilized in determining estimated fair value, have been classified as Level 3.

		OTHER INVESTMENTS

		Other investments include non-marketable equity securities that do not have readily determinable estimated fair values. Certain significant inputs used in determining the estimated fair value of these equities are based on management assumptions or contractual terms with another party that cannot be readily observable in the market. These investments are classified as Level 3 assets.

		DERIVATIVE INSTRUMENTS

		Derivative instruments are reported at estimated fair value using pricing valuation models, which utilize market data inputs or independent broker quotations. Excluding embedded derivatives, as of December 31, 2011, 99% of derivatives based upon

PL-45

		notional values were priced by valuation models. The remaining derivatives were priced by broker quotations. The derivatives are valued using mid-market inputs that are predominantly observable in the market. Inputs used to value derivatives include, but are not limited to, interest swap rates, foreign currency forward and spot rates, credit spreads and correlations, interest volatility, equity volatility and equity index levels. In accordance with the Codification’s Fair Value Measurements and Disclosures Topic, a credit valuation analysis was performed for all derivative positions to measure the risk that the counterparties to the transaction will be unable to perform under the contractual terms (nonperformance risk) and was determined to be immaterial as of December 31, 2011.

		The Company performs a monthly analysis on derivative valuations, which includes both quantitative and qualitative analysis. Examples of procedures performed include, but are not limited to, review of pricing statistics and trends, analyzing the impacts of changes in the market environment, and review of changes in market value for each derivative including those derivatives priced by brokers.

		Derivative instruments classified as Level 2 primarily include interest rate, currency and certain credit default swaps. The derivative valuations are determined using pricing models with inputs that are observable in the market or can be derived principally from or corroborated by observable market data.

		Derivative instruments classified as Level 3 include complex derivatives, such as equity options and swaps and certain credit default swaps. Also included in Level 3 classification are embedded derivatives in certain insurance and reinsurance contracts. These derivatives are valued using pricing models, which utilize both observable and unobservable inputs and, to a lesser extent, broker quotations. A derivative instrument containing Level 1 or Level 2 inputs will be classified as a Level 3 financial instrument in its entirety if it has at least one significant Level 3 input.

		The Company utilizes derivative instruments to manage the risk associated with certain assets and liabilities. However, the derivative instrument may not be classified within the same estimated fair value hierarchy level as the associated assets and liabilities. Therefore, the realized and unrealized gains and losses on derivatives reported in Level 3 may not reflect the offsetting impact of the realized and unrealized gains and losses of the associated assets and liabilities.

		VARIABLE ANNUITY GLB EMBEDDED DERIVATIVES

		Estimated fair values for variable annuity GLB and related reinsurance embedded derivatives are calculated based upon significant unobservable inputs using internally developed models because active, observable markets do not exist for those items. As a result, variable annuity GLB and related reinsurance embedded derivatives are categorized as Level 3. Below is a description of the Company’s estimated fair value methodologies for these embedded derivatives.

		Estimated fair value is calculated as an aggregation of estimated fair value and additional risk margins including Behavior Risk Margin, Mortality Risk Margin and Credit Standing Adjustment. The resulting aggregation is reconciled or calibrated, if necessary, to market information that is, or may be, available to the Company, but may not be observable by other market participants, including reinsurance discussions and transactions. Each of the components described below are unobservable in the market place and requires subjectivity by the Company in determining their value.

	•		Behavior Risk Margin: This component adds a margin that market participants would require for the risk that the Company’s assumptions about policyholder behavior used in the estimated fair value model could differ from actual experience.

	•		Mortality Risk Margin: This component adds a margin in mortality assumptions, both for decrements for policyholders with GLBs, and for expected payout lifetimes in guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefits.

	•		Credit Standing Adjustment: This component makes an adjustment that market participants would make to reflect the chance that GLB obligations or the GLB reinsurance recoverables will not be fulfilled (nonperformance risk).

		SEPARATE ACCOUNT ASSETS

		Separate account assets are primarily invested in mutual funds, but also have investments in fixed maturity and short-term securities. Separate account assets are valued in the same manner, and using the same pricing sources and inputs, as the fixed maturity and equity securities available for sale of the Company. Mutual funds are included in Level 1. Most fixed maturity securities are included in Level 2. Level 3 assets include any investments where estimated fair value is based on management

PL-46

		assumptions or obtained from independent third-parties and estimated fair value measurement inputs are not sufficiently transparent.

		LEVEL 3 RECONCILIATION

		The tables below present reconciliations of the beginning and ending balances of the Level 3 financial assets and liabilities, net, that have been measured at estimated fair value on a recurring basis using significant unobservable inputs.


										Transfers
				Total Gains or Losses						In and/or
	January 1,			Included in			Included in			Out of												December 31,
	2011			Earnings			OCI			Level 3 ⁽¹⁾			Purchases			Sales			Settlements			2011
	(In Millions)
Obligations of states and political subdivisions	$	39					$	3		$	(33	)										$	9
Foreign governments		70									14								$	(3	)		81
Corporate securities		1,628		$	(6	)		14			(2	)	$	366		$	(164	)		(219	)		1,617
RMBS		1,068			(66	)		55			141			17			(12	)		(167	)		1,036
CMBS		254						3						47						(53	)		251
Collateralized debt obligations		115			3			(2	)											(5	)		111
Other asset-backed securities		280			2			7			2			31						(26	)		296

Total fixed maturity securities ⁽²⁾		3,454			(67	)		80			122			461			(176	)		(473	)		3,401


Perpetual preferred securities		12									14												26
Other equity securities		1									(1	)											—

Total equity securities ⁽²⁾		13			—			—			13			—			—			—			26


Trading securities ⁽²⁾		66									(2	)		20			(4	)		(45	)		35
Other investments ⁽²⁾		173			34			(12	)					2			(143	)					54
Derivatives, net:
Foreign currency and interest rate swaps		4									(4	)											—
Equity derivatives		185			91									81						120			477
Embedded derivatives		(593	)		(1,167	)								(52	)					37			(1,775	)
Other		17			26						(1	)								(37	)		5

Total derivatives		(387	)		(1,050	)		—			(5	)		29			—			120			(1,293	)


Separate account assets ⁽³⁾		100			2						1			11						(1	)		113

Total	$	3,419		$	(1,081	)	$	68		$	129		$	523		$	(323	)	$	(399	)	$	2,336

PL-47


													Purchases,
										Transfers			Sales,
				Total Gains or Losses						In and/or			Issuances,
	January 1,			Included in			Included in			Out of			and			December 31,
	2010			Earnings			OCI			Level 3 ⁽¹⁾			Settlements			2010
	(In Millions)
U.S. Treasury securities	$	6											$	(6	)
Obligations of states and political subdivisions		34		$	4		$	(7	)	$	(4	)		12		$	39
Foreign governments		108						7			(43	)		(2	)		70
Corporate securities		2,287			38			25			(547	)		(175	)		1,628
RMBS		3,650			(44	)		500			(2,407	)		(631	)		1,068
CMBS		327						20			(59	)		(34	)		254
Collateralized debt obligations		104			5			7			2			(3	)		115
Other asset-backed securities		235						7			65			(27	)		280

Total fixed maturity securities ⁽²⁾		6,751			3			559			(2,993	)		(866	)		3,454


Perpetual preferred securities		70						3			(42	)		(19	)		12
Other equity securities								1									1

Total equity securities ⁽²⁾		70			—			4			(42	)		(19	)		13


Trading securities ⁽²⁾		29			2						27			8			66
Other investments ⁽²⁾		163						6						4			173
Derivatives, net:
Foreign currency and interest rate swaps		3						1									4
Equity derivatives		282			(173	)								76			185
Embedded derivatives		(746	)		162									(9	)		(593	)
Other		14			22									(19	)		17

Total derivatives		(447	)		11			1			—			48			(387	)


Separate account assets ⁽³⁾		101			6									(7	)		100

Total	$	6,667		$	22		$	570		$	(3,008	)	$	(832	)	$	3,419


⁽¹⁾		Transfers in and/or out are recognized at the end of each quarterly reporting period.

⁽²⁾		Amounts included in earnings are recognized either in net investment income or net realized investment gain (loss).

⁽³⁾		The realized/unrealized gains (losses) included in net income for separate account assets are offset by an equal amount for separate account liabilities, which results in a net zero impact on net income for the Company.

		During the year ended December 31, 2011, the Company transferred $884 million of fixed maturity securities out of Level 2 and into Level 3, and transferred $762 million of fixed maturity securities out of Level 3 and into Level 2. The net transfers into Level 3 were primarily attributable to the decreased availability and use of market observable inputs to estimate fair value. During the year ended December 31, 2011, the Company did not have any significant transfers between Level 1 and Level 2.

		During the year ended December 31, 2010, the Company transferred $923 million of fixed maturity securities out of Level 2 and into Level 3, and transferred $3,916 million of fixed maturity securities out of Level 3 and into Level 2. The net transfers into Level 2 were primarily attributable to the increased use of market observable inputs to estimate fair value for non-agency RMBS. During the first three quarters of 2010, the Company utilized an internally developed weighting of valuations for non-agency RMBS which were reported as Level 3 securities. In the fourth quarter of 2010, the Company determined that there had been an increase in the volume and level of trading activity for these securities and utilized prices obtained from third-party pricing services. As a result, these securities were transferred out of Level 3 and classified as Level 2 securities. During the year ended December 31, 2010, the Company did not have any significant transfers between Level 1 and 2.

PL-48

The table below represents the net amount of total gains or losses for the period, attributable to the change in unrealized gains (losses) relating to assets and liabilities classified as Level 3 that were still held at the end of the reporting period.


	December 31,
	2011			2010

	(In Millions)
Corporate securities ⁽¹⁾				$	(2	)
Derivatives, net: ⁽¹⁾
Equity derivatives	$	206			249
Embedded derivatives		(1,165	)		164
Other		9			13

Total derivatives		(950	)		426


Separate account assets ⁽²⁾		2			7

Total	$	(948	)	$	431


⁽¹⁾		Amounts are recognized in net realized investment gain (loss).

⁽²⁾		The realized/unrealized gains (losses) included in net income for separate account assets are offset by an equal amount for separate account liabilities, which results in a net zero impact on net income for the Company.

		NONRECURRING FAIR VALUE MEASUREMENTS

		Certain assets are measured at estimated fair value on a nonrecurring basis and are not included in the tables presented above. The amounts below relate to certain investments measured at estimated fair value during the year and still held at the reporting date.


	Year Ended December 31, 2011							Year Ended December 31, 2010
	Carrying Value		Estimated Fair		Net			Carrying Value		Estimated Fair		Net
	Prior to		Value After		Investment			Prior to		Value After		Investment
	Measurement		Measurement		Loss			Measurement		Measurement		Loss
	(In Millions)
Mortgage loans	$	8	$	3	$	(5	)
Real estate investments		8		7		(1	)	$	69	$	42	$	(27	)
Aircraft		51		36		(15	)		24		20		(4	)

		MORTGAGE LOANS

		During the year ended December 31, 2011, the Company recognized an impairment of $5 million, which is included in OTTIs and is related to two commercial mortgage loans, which are currently in the process of foreclosure. The estimated fair value after measurement is based on the underlying real estate collateral of the two loans. These write-downs to estimated fair value represent nonrecurring fair value measurements that have been classified as Level 3 due to the limited activity and lack of price transparency inherent in the market for such investments.

		REAL ESTATE INVESTMENTS

		During the years ended December 31, 2011 and 2010, the Company recognized impairments of $1 million and $27 million, respectively, which are included in OTTIs. The impaired investments presented above were accounted for using the cost basis. Real estate investments are evaluated for impairment based on the undiscounted cash flows expected to be received during the estimated holding period. When the undiscounted cash flows are less than the current carrying value of the property (gross cost less accumulated depreciation), the property may be considered impaired and written-down to its estimated fair value. Estimated fair value is determined using a combination of the present value of the expected future cash flows and comparable sales. These

PL-49

		write-downs to estimated fair value represent nonrecurring fair value measurements that have been classified as Level 3 due to the limited activity and lack of price transparency inherent in the market for such investments.

		AIRCRAFT

		During the years ended December 31, 2011 and 2010, the Company recognized impairments of $15 million and $4 million, respectively, which are included in operating and other expenses, as a result of declines in the estimated future cash flows to be received from five and two aircraft, respectively. The Company evaluates carrying values of aircraft based upon changes in market and other physical and economic conditions and records write-offs to recognize losses in the value of aircraft when management believes that, based on future estimated cash flows, the recoverability of the Company’s investment in an aircraft has been impaired. The estimated fair value is based on the present value of the future cash flows, which include contractual lease agreements, projected future lease payments as well as a disposition value. Projected future lease payments are based upon current contracted lease rates for similar aircraft and industry trends. The disposition value reflects an aircraft’s estimated residual value or estimated sales price. The cash flows were based on unobservable inputs and have been classified as Level 3.

		The Company did not have any other nonfinancial assets or liabilities measured at fair value on a nonrecurring basis resulting from impairments as of December 31, 2011 and 2010. The Company has not made any changes in the valuation methodologies for nonfinancial assets and liabilities.

		The carrying amount and estimated fair value of the Company’s financial instruments that are not carried at fair value under the Codification’s Financial Instruments Topic are as follows:


	December 31, 2011				December 31, 2010
	Carrying		Estimated		Carrying		Estimated
	Amount		Fair Value		Amount		Fair Value
	(In Millions)
Assets:
Mortgage loans	$	7,596	$	7,818	$	6,693	$	6,906
Policy loans		6,812		6,812		6,690		6,690
Other invested assets		193		218		183		190
Cash and cash equivalents		2,829		2,829		2,270		2,270
Restricted cash		280		280		214		214
Liabilities:
Funding agreements and GICs ⁽¹⁾		4,284		4,632		6,635		7,127
Annuity and deposit liabilities		9,162		9,162		8,335		8,335
Long-term debt		7,152		7,072		6,516		6,775


⁽¹⁾		Balance excludes embedded derivatives that are included in the fair value hierarchy level tables above.

		The following methods and assumptions were used to estimate the fair value of these financial instruments as of December 31, 2011 and 2010:

		MORTGAGE LOANS

		The estimated fair value of the mortgage loan portfolio is determined by discounting the estimated future cash flows, using current rates that are applicable to similar credit quality, property type and average maturity of the composite portfolio.

		POLICY LOANS

		Policy loans are not separable from their associated insurance contract and bear no credit risk since they do not exceed the contract’s cash surrender value, making these assets fully secured by the cash surrender value of the contracts. Therefore, the carrying amount of the policy loans is a reasonable approximation of their fair value.

PL-50

15.		OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

		The Company displays comprehensive income and its components on the consolidated statements of equity. The disclosure of the gross components of other comprehensive income and related taxes are as follows:


	Years Ended December 31,
	2011			2010			2009

	(In Millions)
Unrealized gain (loss) on derivatives and securities available for sale, net:
Gross holding gain (loss):
Securities available for sale	$	1,054		$	1,272		$	2,594
Derivatives		(9	)		15			(146	)
Income tax expense		(365	)		(438	)		(861	)
Reclassification adjustment:
Sale of securities available for sale — net realized investment gain		(106	)		(139	)		(13	)
OTTI recognized on securities available for sale		137			75			271
Derivatives — net investment income		22						(1	)
Derivatives — net realized investment gain		(18	)
Derivatives — interest credited		48			24			26
Income tax benefit		(29	)		(1	)		(98	)
Allocation of holding gain to DAC		(94	)		(255	)		(415	)
Allocation of holding gain (loss) to future policy benefits		(54	)		41			85
Income tax expense		52			75			113
Cumulative effect of adoption of new accounting pronouncement								(263	)
Income tax expense								93

Unrealized gain on derivatives and securities available for sale, net		638			669			1,385


Other, net:
Holding gain (loss) on other securities		(12	)		9			22
Income tax (expense) benefit		4			(4	)		(8	)

Net unrealized gain (loss) on other securities		(8	)		5			14
Other, net of tax		(4	)		(3	)		33

Other, net		(12	)		2			47

Total other comprehensive income, net	$	626		$	671		$	1,432

16.		REINSURANCE

		Reinsurance receivables and payables generally include amounts related to claims, reserves and reserve related items. Reinsurance receivables, included in other assets, were $507 million and $326 million as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively. Reinsurance payables, included in other liabilities, were $146 million and $47 million as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively.

PL-52

The components of insurance premiums presented in the consolidated statements of operations are as follows:


	Years Ended December 31,
	2011			2010			2009

	(In Millions)
Direct premiums	$	1,051		$	626		$	666
Reinsurance assumed ⁽¹⁾		256			122			60
Reinsurance ceded ⁽²⁾		(325	)		(339	)		(323	)

Insurance premiums	$	982		$	409		$	403


⁽¹⁾		Included are $18 million, $11 million and $4 million of assumed premiums from Pacific Life Re Limited (PLR), an affiliate of the Company and a wholly owned subsidiary of Pacific LifeCorp, for the years ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009, respectively. PLR is incorporated in the United Kingdom (UK) and provides reinsurance to insurance and annuity providers in the UK, Ireland and to insurers in selected markets in Asia. Also included for the year ended December 31, 2010 is $59 million of assumed premiums from PAR Bermuda.

⁽²⁾		Included are $21 million of reinsurance ceded to PAR Bermuda for the years ended December 31, 2010 and 2009.

17.		EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS

		PENSION PLANS

		Prior to December 31, 2007, Pacific Life provided a defined benefit pension plan (ERP) covering all eligible employees of the Company. The Company amended the ERP to terminate effective December 31, 2007. In September 2009, the Company received regulatory approval to commence the final termination of the ERP and payment of plan benefits to the participants. The Company completed the final distribution of plan assets to participants in December 2009. The Company recognized settlement costs of $72 million during the year ended December 31, 2009.

		Pacific Life maintains supplemental employee retirement plans (SERPs) for certain eligible employees. As of December 31, 2011 and 2010, the projected benefit obligation was $46 million and $44 million, respectively. The fair value of plan assets as of December 31, 2011 and 2010 was zero. The net periodic benefit expense of the SERPs was $5 million, $5 million and $4 million for the years ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009, respectively.

		The Company incurred a net pension expense of $5 million, $5 million and $79 million for the years ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009, respectively, as detailed in the following table:


	Years Ended December 31,
	2011				2010				2009
	ERP		SERP		ERP		SERP		ERP			SERP
	(In Millions)				(In Millions)				(In Millions)
Components of the net periodic pension expense:
Service cost — benefits earned during the year			$	2			$	2				$	2
Interest cost on projected benefit obligation				2				2	$	12			2
Expected return on plan assets										(12	)
Settlement costs										72
Amortization of net loss, net obligations and prior service cost				1				1		3

Net periodic pension expense		—	$	5		—	$	5	$	75		$	4

PL-53

Significant plan assumptions:


	December 31,
	2011			2010

Weighted-average assumptions used to determine benefit obligations for the SERP:
Discount rate		4.00	%		4.75	%
Salary rate		4.50	%		4.50	%

Years Ended December 31,

2011

2010

2009

Weighed-average assumptions used to determine the ERP’s net periodic pension expense:

Discount rate

N/A

6.30

Expected long-term return on plan assets

N/A

		The salary rate used to determine the net periodic pension expense for the SERP was 4.50% for the years ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009.

		Pacific Life’s expected SERP contribution payments are as follows for the years ending December 31 (In Millions):


2012	2013		2014		2015		2016		2017-2021
$5	$	4	$	4	$	4	$	3	$	14

		RETIREMENT INCENTIVE SAVINGS PLAN

		Pacific Life provides a Retirement Incentive Savings Plan (RISP) covering all eligible employees of Pacific LifeCorp and certain of its subsidiaries. The RISP matches 75% of each employee’s contributions, up to a maximum of 6% of eligible employee compensation in cash. Contributions made by the Company to the RISP, including the matching contribution, amounted to $28 million, $27 million and $26 million for the years ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009, respectively, and are included in operating expenses.

		POSTRETIREMENT BENEFITS

		Pacific Life provides a defined benefit health care plan and a defined benefit life insurance plan (the Plans) that provide postretirement benefits for all eligible retirees and their dependents. Generally, qualified employees may become eligible for these benefits if they have reached normal retirement age, have been covered under Pacific Life’s policy as an active employee for a minimum continuous period prior to the date retired, and have an employment date before January 1, 1990. The Plans contain cost-sharing features such as deductibles and coinsurance, and require retirees to make contributions, which can be adjusted annually. Pacific Life’s commitment to qualified employees who retire after April 1, 1994 is limited to specific dollar amounts. Pacific Life reserves the right to modify or terminate the Plans at any time. As in the past, the general policy is to fund these benefits on a pay-as-you-go basis.

		The net periodic postretirement benefit cost for each of the years ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009 was $1 million. As of December 31, 2011 and 2010, the accumulated benefit obligation was $23 million and $19 million, respectively. The fair value of the plan assets as of December 31, 2011 and 2010 was zero.

		The discount rate used in determining the accumulated postretirement benefit obligation was 4.25% and 4.85% for 2011 and 2010, respectively.

PL-54

Benefit payments for the year ended December 31, 2011 amounted to $2 million. The expected benefit payments are as follows for the years ending December 31 (In Millions):


2012	2013	2014	2015	2016	2017-2021
$2	$2	$2	$2	$2	$9

		OTHER PLANS

		The Company has deferred compensation plans that permit eligible employees to defer portions of their compensation and earn interest on the deferred amounts. The interest rate is determined quarterly. The compensation that has been deferred has been accrued and the primary expense related to this plan, other than compensation, is interest on the deferred amounts. The Company also has performance-based incentive compensation plans for its employees.

18.		INCOME TAXES

		The provision for income taxes is as follows:


	Years Ended December 31,
	2011			2010		2009

	(In Millions)
Current	$	5		$	7	$	(407	)
Deferred		141			56		451

Provision for income taxes from continuing operations		146			63		44
Benefit from income taxes from discontinued operations		(4	)				(11	)

Total	$	142		$	63	$	33

A reconciliation of the provision for income taxes from continuing operations based on the Federal corporate statutory tax rate of 35% to the provision for income taxes from continuing operations reflected in the consolidated financial statements is as follows:


	Years Ended December 31,
	2011			2010			2009

	(In Millions)
Provision for income taxes at the statutory rate	$	318		$	205		$	170
Separate account dividends received deduction		(95	)		(106	)		(93	)
Singapore Transfer		(32	)		(17	)
LIHTC and foreign tax credits		(17	)		(18	)		(19	)
Internal Revenue Service settlement		(7	)
Other		(21	)		(1	)		(14	)

Provision for income taxes from continuing operations	$	146		$	63		$	44

		During 2010 and 2011, ACG transferred aircraft assets and related liabilities to foreign subsidiaries and affiliates in Singapore (collectively referred to as the Singapore Transfer). The Singapore Transfer reduced the provision for income taxes for the year ended December 31, 2011 and 2010 by $32 million and $17 million, respectively, primarily due to the reversal of deferred taxes related to bases differences in the interest transferred. U.S. income taxes have not been recognized on the excess of the amount for financial reporting over the tax basis of investments in foreign subsidiaries that are essentially permanent in duration. This amount becomes taxable upon a repatriation of assets from the subsidiary or a sale or liquidation of the subsidiary.

		It is the practice and intention of the Company to reinvest the earnings of its non-U.S. subsidiaries in those operations. In addition to those basis differences transferred during 2011 and 2010, as of December 31, 2011, the Company has not made a provision for U.S. or additional foreign withholding taxes on approximately $6.5 million of foreign subsidiary undistributed earnings that are essentially permanent in duration. Generally, such amounts become subject to U.S. taxation upon the remittance of dividends and

PL-55

		under certain other circumstances. It is not practicable to estimate the amount of deferred tax liability related to investments in these foreign subsidiaries.

		A reconciliation of the changes in the unrecognized tax benefits is as follows (In Millions):


Balance at January 1, 2009	$	434
Additions and deletions		(420	)

Balance at December 31, 2009		14

Additions and deletions
Balance at December 31, 2010		14
Additions and deletions		(14	)

Balance at December 31, 2011	$	0

		During the year ended December 31, 2009, the Company’s contingency related to the accounting for uncertainty in income taxes decreased by $420 million. The Company resolved an uncertain tax accounting position on certain tax deductions resulting in a $402 million decrease. The Company also effectively settled $18 million of the gross uncertain tax position related to separate account Dividends Received Deductions (DRD), which resulted in the realization of $9 million of tax benefits.

		During the year ended December 31, 2011, the Company effectively settled $14 million of the gross uncertain tax position related to separate account DRD, which resulted in the realization of $7 million of tax benefits. All realized tax benefits and related interest are recognized as a discrete item that will impact the effective tax rate in the accounting period in which the uncertain tax position is ultimately settled.

		No unrecognized tax benefits will be realized over the next twelve months.

		During the years ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009, the Company paid an insignificant amount of interest and penalties to state tax authorities.

PL-56

The net deferred tax liability, included in other liabilities, is comprised of the following tax effected temporary differences:


	December 31,
	2011			2010

	(In Millions)

Deferred tax assets:
Investment valuation	$	590		$	247
Tax net operating loss carryforwards		510			220
Policyholder reserves		349			672
Tax credit carryforwards		313			312
Deferred compensation		57			54
Aircraft maintenance reserves		13			24
Dividends to policyholders		8			8
Other		16			24

Total deferred tax assets		1,856			1,561


Deferred tax liabilities:
DAC		(1,546	)		(1,257	)
Depreciation		(671	)		(625	)
Hedging		(116	)		(81	)
Partnership income		(63	)		(59	)
Reinsurance		(20	)		(27	)
Other		(117	)		(48	)

Total deferred tax liabilities		(2,533	)		(2,097	)


Net deferred tax liability from continuing operations		(677	)		(536	)
Unrealized gain on derivatives and securities available for sale		(485	)		(143	)
Minimum pension liability and other adjustments		(8	)		(12	)

Net deferred tax liability		($1,170	)		($691	)

		The tax net operating loss carryforwards relate to Federal tax losses incurred in 1998 through 2011 with a 20-year carryforward for non-life losses and a 15-year carryforward for life losses, and California tax losses incurred in 2004 through 2011 with a ten-year carryforward.

		The tax credit carryforwards relate to LIHTC, foreign tax credits, and alternative minimum tax (AMT) credits generated from 2000 to 2011. The LIHTC begin to expire in 2020. The foreign tax credits begin to expire in 2016. Foreign tax credits and tax net operating loss carryforwards of $153 million expire between 2016 and 2021. AMT credits and tax net operating loss carryforwards of $29 million possess no expiration date. The remainder will expire between 2022 and 2031.

		The Codification’s Income Taxes Topic requires the reduction of deferred tax assets by a valuation allowance if, based on the weight of available evidence, it is more likely than not that a portion or all of the deferred tax assets will not be realized. Based on management’s assessment, it is more likely than not that the Company’s deferred tax assets will be realized through future taxable income, including the reversal of deferred tax liabilities.

		The Company files income tax returns in U.S. Federal and various state jurisdictions. The Company is under continuous audit by the Internal Revenue Service (IRS) and is audited periodically by some state taxing authorities. The IRS has completed audits of the Company’s tax returns through the tax year ended December 31, 2008. The State of California concluded audits for tax years 2003 and 2004 without material assessment. The Company does not expect the current Federal audits to result in any material assessments.

PL-57

19.

SEGMENT INFORMATION

The Company has four operating segments: Life Insurance, Retirement Solutions, Aircraft Leasing and Reinsurance, a new segment formed as a result of the acquisition of the retrocession business disclosed in Note 5. These segments are managed separately and have been identified based on differences in products and services offered. All other activity is included in the Corporate and Other segment.

The Life Insurance segment provides a broad range of life insurance products through multiple distribution channels operating in the upper income and corporate markets. Principal products include UL, VUL, survivor life, interest sensitive whole life, corporate-owned life insurance and traditional products such as whole life and term life. Distribution channels include regional life offices, marketing organizations, broker-dealer firms, wirehouses and M Financial, an association of independently owned and operated insurance and financial producers.

The Retirement Solutions segment’s principal products include variable and fixed annuity products, mutual funds, and structured settlement and group retirement annuities, which are offered through multiple distribution channels. Distribution channels include independent planners, financial institutions and national/regional wirehouses.

The Aircraft Leasing segment offers aircraft leasing to the airline industry throughout the world and provides brokerage and asset management services to other third-parties.

The Reinsurance segment primarily includes the domestic life retrocession business, which was acquired in August 2011 (Note 5). Also included in the Reinsurance segment is international reinsurance the Company has assumed from PLR.

The Corporate and Other segment consists of assets and activities which support the Company’s operating segments. Included in these support activities is the management of investments, certain entity level hedging activities and other expenses and other assets not directly attributable to the operating segments. The Corporate and Other segment also includes several operations that do not qualify as operating segments and the elimination of intersegment transactions. Discontinued operations (Note 6) are also included in the Corporate and Other segment.

The Company uses the same accounting policies and procedures to measure segment net income (loss) and assets as it uses to measure its consolidated net income (loss) and assets. Net investment income and net realized investment gain (loss) are allocated based on invested assets purchased and held as is required for transacting the business of that segment. Overhead expenses are allocated based on services provided. Interest expense is allocated based on the short-term borrowing needs of the segment and is included in net investment income. The provision (benefit) for income taxes is allocated based on each segment’s actual tax provision (benefit).

Certain segments are allocated equity based on formulas determined by management and receive a fixed interest rate of return on interdivision debentures supporting the allocated equity. The debenture amount is reflected as investment expense in net investment income in the Corporate and Other segment and as investment income in the operating segments.

The Company generates the majority of its revenues and net income from customers located in the U.S. As of December 31, 2011 and 2010, the Company had foreign investments with an estimated fair value of $8.2 billion and $8.0 billion, respectively. Aircraft leased to foreign customers were $5.3 billion and $5.1 billion as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively. Revenues derived from any customer did not exceed 10% of consolidated total revenues for the years ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009.

PL-58

The following is segment information as of and for the year ended December 31, 2011:


	Life			Retirement			Aircraft					Corporate
	Insurance			Solutions			Leasing			Reinsurance		and Other			Total

REVENUES	(In Millions)
Policy fees and insurance premiums	$	1,182		$	1,701					$	198				$	3,081
Net investment income		954			818						4	$	410			2,186
Net realized investment gain (loss)		83			(1,076	)	$	(3	)				335			(661	)
OTTIs		(38	)		(33	)							(82	)		(153	)
Investment advisory fees		22			233								13			268
Aircraft leasing revenue								607								607
Other income		13			159			48			3		3			226

Total revenues		2,216			1,802			652			205		679			5,554


BENEFITS AND EXPENSES
Policy benefits		429			1,343						179					1,951
Interest credited		736			302								280			1,318
Commission expenses		428			(352	)					6		1			83
Operating expenses		352			168			99			18		113			750
Depreciation of aircraft								255								255
Interest expense								194					94			288

Total benefits and expenses		1,945			1,461			548			203		488			4,645


Income from continuing operations before provision (benefit) for income taxes		271			341			104			2		191			909
Provision (benefit) for income taxes		84			25			(7	)		1		43			146

Income from continuing operations		187			316			111			1		148			763
Discontinued operations, net of taxes													(9	)		(9	)


Net income		187			316			111			1		139			754
Less: net income attributable to the noncontrolling interest from continuing operations								(6	)				(65	)		(71	)

Net income attributable to the Company	$	187		$	316		$	105		$	1	$	74		$	683


Total assets	$	31,334		$	66,764		$	7,389		$	568	$	8,565		$	114,620
DAC		1,350			3,843						70					5,263
Separate account assets		5,698			45,752											51,450
Policyholder and contract liabilities		22,400			16,926						244		4,289			43,859
Separate account liabilities		5,698			45,752											51,450

PL-59

The following is segment information as of and for the year ended December 31, 2010:


	Life			Retirement			Aircraft						Corporate
	Insurance			Solutions			Leasing			Reinsurance			and Other			Total

REVENUES	(In Millions)
Policy fees and insurance premiums	$	1,092		$	1,265					$	10					$	2,367
Net investment income		924			748								$	450			2,122
Net realized investment gain (loss)		55			(73	)	$	(2	)					(74	)		(94	)
OTTIs		(21	)		(10	)								(82	)		(113	)
Investment advisory fees		21			224												245
Aircraft leasing revenue								591									591
Other income		11			141			57			2			19			230

Total revenues		2,082			2,295			646			12			313			5,348


BENEFITS AND EXPENSES
Policy benefits		432			923						(4	)					1,351
Interest credited		700			282									335			1,317
Commission expenses		355			475									1			831
Operating expenses		297			339			60						65			761
Depreciation of aircraft								241									241
Interest expense								178						84			262

Total benefits and expenses		1,784			2,019			479			(4	)		485			4,763


Income (loss) from continuing operations before provision (benefit) for income taxes		298			276			167			16			(172	)		585
Provision (benefit) for income taxes		93			(9	)		41			6			(68	)		63


Net income (loss)		205			285			126			10			(104	)		522
Less: net income attributable to the noncontrolling interest from continuing operations								(9	)					(41	)		(50	)

Net income (loss) attributable to the Company	$	205		$	285		$	117		$	10		$	(145	)	$	472


Total assets	$	30,337		$	67,415		$	6,893		$	2		$	10,015		$	114,662
DAC		1,598			2,836									1			4,435
Separate account assets		5,982			49,701												55,683
Policyholder and contract liabilities		21,776			13,743						(5	)		6,642			42,156
Separate account liabilities		5,982			49,701												55,683

PL-60

The following is segment information for the year ended December 31, 2009:


	Life			Retirement			Aircraft					Corporate
	Insurance			Solutions			Leasing			Reinsurance		and Other			Total

REVENUES	(In Millions)
Policy fees and insurance premiums	$	1,063		$	1,209					$	3					$	2,275
Net investment income		892			610		$	1				$	359				1,862
Net realized investment gain (loss)					311			7					(165	)			153
OTTIs		(63	)		(53	)							(195	)			(311	)
Investment advisory fees		18			190												208
Aircraft leasing revenue								578									578
Other income		10			112			13					2				137

Total revenues		1,920			2,379			599			3		1				4,902


BENEFITS AND EXPENSES
Policy benefits		363			863												1,226
Interest credited		681			193								379				1,253
Commission expenses		353			337								1				691
Operating expenses		290			285			59					148				782
Depreciation of aircraft								227									227
Interest expense								182					55				237

Total benefits and expenses		1,687			1,678			468					583				4,416


Income (loss) from continuing operations before provision (benefit) for income taxes		233			701			131			3		(582	)			486
Provision (benefit) for income taxes		66			147			39			1		(209	)			44


Income (loss) from continuing operations		167			554			92			2		(373	)			442
Discontinued operations, net of taxes													(20	)			(20	)

Net income (loss)		167			554			92			2		(393	)			422
Less: net (income) loss attributable to the noncontrolling interest from continuing operations								(9	)				23				14

Net income (loss) attributable to the Company	$	167		$	554		$	83		$	2	$	(370	)		$	436

20.

TRANSACTIONS WITH AFFILIATES

PLFA serves as the investment adviser for the Pacific Select Fund, an investment vehicle provided to the Company’s variable life insurance policyholders and variable annuity contract owners, and the Pacific Life Funds, the investment vehicle for the Company’s mutual fund products. Investment advisory and other fees are based primarily upon the net asset value of the underlying portfolios. These fees, included in investment advisory fees and other income, amounted to $294 million, $291 million and $244 million for the years ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009, respectively. In addition, Pacific Life provides certain support services to the Pacific Select Fund, the Pacific Life Funds and other affiliates based on an allocation of actual costs. These fees amounted to $10 million, $8 million and $9 million for the years ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009, respectively.

Additionally, the Pacific Select Fund and Pacific Life Funds have service and other plans whereby the funds pay PSD, as distributor of the fund, a service fee in connection with services rendered to or procured for shareholders of the fund or their variable annuity and life insurance contract owners. These services may include, but are not limited to, payment of compensation to broker-dealers, including PSD itself, and other financial institutions and organizations, which assist in providing any of the services. For the years

PL-61

ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009, PSD received $115 million, $100 million and $86 million, respectively, in service and other fees from the Pacific Select Fund and Pacific Life Funds, which are recorded in other income.

ACG has derivative swap contracts with Pacific LifeCorp as the counterparty. The notional amounts total $1.3 billion and $1.5 billion as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively. The estimated fair values of the derivatives were net liabilities of $78 million and $62 million as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively.

21.

COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES

COMMITMENTS

The Company has outstanding commitments to make investments primarily in fixed maturity securities, mortgage loans, limited partnerships and other investments, as follows (In Millions):


Years Ending December 31:
2012	$	610
2013 through 2016		913
2017 and thereafter		124

Total	$	1,647

The Company leases office facilities under various operating leases, which in most, but not all cases, are noncancelable. Rent expense, which is included in operating and other expenses, in connection with these leases was $10 million, $9 million and $8 million for the years ended December 31, 2011, 2010 and 2009, respectively. In connection with the sale of a block of business in 2005, PL&A is contingently liable until March 31, 2013 for certain future rent and expense obligations, not to exceed $6 million, related to an office lease that has been assigned to the buyer. Aggregate minimum future commitments are as follows (In Millions):


Years Ending December 31:
2012	$	11
2013 through 2016		23
2017 and thereafter		11

Total	$	45

In 2011, ACG entered into a sale leaseback transaction of one commercial aircraft on long-term lease to a U.S. airline. As a result of this transaction, the Company has committed to an operating lease, the expense of which is included in operating and other expenses, expiring March 2023. In 2010, ACG entered into a sale leaseback transaction of two commercial aircraft on long-term lease to a U.S. airline. As a result of this transaction, the Company has committed to two operating leases, the expense of which is included in operating and other expenses, expiring December 2025. Aggregate minimum future lease commitments and minimum rentals to be received in the future are as follows (In Millions):


	Minimum Future		Minimum Rentals to
Years Ending December 31:	Commitments		be Received
2012	$	8	$	13
2013 through 2016		38		54
2017 and thereafter		80		81

Total	$	126	$	148

PL-62

As of December 31, 2011, ACG has commitments with major aircraft manufacturers and other third-parties to purchase aircraft at an estimated delivery price of $7,569 million with delivery from 2012 through 2020. These purchase commitments may be funded:

	•		up to $1,239 million in less than one year,

	•		an additional $2,333 million in one to three years,

	•		an additional $1,522 million in three to five years, and

	•		an additional $1,779 million thereafter.

As of December 31, 2011, deposits related to these agreements totaled $696 million and are included in other assets.

In connection with the acquisition of the life retrocession business as discussed in Note 5, Pacific Life entered into agreements to reinsure a block of U.S. life reinsurance business on a 100% coinsurance basis. The underlying reinsurance is comprised of coinsurance and YRT treaties. Upon closing the transaction in August 2011, Pacific Life retroceded the majority of the underlying YRT treaties on a 100% modified coinsurance basis to PLRB effective July 1, 2011 (PLRB Agreement). The PLRB Agreement will be accounted for under deposit accounting under U.S. GAAP and as reinsurance under statutory accounting practices. The statutory accounting reserve credit is afforded by virtue of collateral posted by PLRB for the benefit of Pacific Life by a $430 million letter of credit issued to PLRB by third-party banks. In connection with the letter of credit agreement, Pacific LifeCorp entered into a capital maintenance agreement to ensure PLRB will have sufficient capital to meet its obligations. Additionally, certain assets related to the life retrocession business have been pledged and placed in reinsurance trusts (Note 8). If the estimated fair market value of the pledged assets in these trusts fall below a minimum value, as defined in the transaction agreements, the Company is required to promptly deposit additional funds into the trusts to account for any shortfall.

On March 29, 2010, the Company entered into an agreement with PLR to guarantee the performance of unaffiliated reinsurance obligations of PLR. For the years ended December 31, 2011 and 2010, the Company earned $2 million under the agreement for its guarantee. This guarantee is secondary to a similar guarantee provided by Pacific LifeCorp and would only be triggered in the event of nonperformance by both PLR and Pacific LifeCorp. Management believes that any additional obligations, if any, related to the guarantee agreement are not likely to have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

In connection with the reinsurance of NLGR benefits ceded from Pacific Life to PAR Vermont (Note 2), PAR Bermuda and PAR Vermont entered into a three year letter of credit agreement with a group of banks in April 2009. This agreement allows for the issuance of letters of credit with an expiration date of March 2012 to PAR Bermuda and PAR Vermont for up to a combined total amount of $650 million. As of December 31, 2010, the letter of credit issued from this facility for PAR Bermuda was cancelled. In November 2011, PAR Vermont replaced its $650 million letter of credit agreement with a new letter of credit agreement with a maximum commitment amount of $843 million and a 20 year term. As of December 31, 2011, the letter of credit amounted to $416 million. The new agreement is non-recourse to Pacific LifeCorp or any of its affiliates, other than PAR Vermont.

In connection with an acquisition in 2005, ACG assumed residual value support agreements with remaining expiration dates ranging from 2013 to 2015. The gross remaining residual value exposure under these agreements was $89 million and $99 million as of December 31, 2011 and 2010, respectively. As of December 31, 2011, the Company has estimated that it has no measurable liability under the remaining residual value guarantee agreements.

CONTINGENCIES — LITIGATION

The Company is a respondent in a number of legal proceedings, some of which involve allegations for extra-contractual damages. Although the Company is confident of its position in these matters, success is not a certainty and it is possible that in any case a judge or jury could rule against the Company. In the opinion of management, the outcome of such proceedings is not likely to have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated financial position. The Company believes adequate provision has been made in its consolidated financial statements for all probable and estimable losses for litigation claims against the Company.

CONTINGENCIES — IRS REVENUE RULING

In 2007, the IRS issued Revenue Ruling 2007-54, which provided the IRS’ interpretation of tax law regarding the computation of the DRD and Revenue Ruling 2007-61, which suspended Revenue Ruling 2007-54 and indicated the IRS would address the proper interpretation of tax law in a regulation project that is on the IRS’ priority guidance plan. Although no guidance has been issued, if the IRS ultimately adopts the interpretation contained in Revenue Ruling 2007-54, the Company could lose a substantial amount of DRD tax benefits, which could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

PL-63

CONTINGENCIES — OTHER

In connection with the sale of certain broker-dealer subsidiaries (Note 6), certain indemnifications triggered by breaches of representations, warranties or covenants were provided by the Company. Also, included in the indemnifications is indemnification for certain third-party claims arising from the normal operation of these broker-dealers prior to the closing and within the nine month period following the sale. Management believes that claims, if any, against the Company related to such indemnification matters are not likely to have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

In the course of its business, the Company provides certain indemnifications related to other dispositions, acquisitions, investments, lease agreements or other transactions that are triggered by, among other things, breaches of representations, warranties or covenants provided by the Company. These obligations are typically subject to time limitations that vary in duration, including contractual limitations and those that arise by operation of law, such as applicable statutes of limitation. Because the amounts of these types of indemnifications often are not explicitly stated, the overall maximum amount of the obligation under such indemnifications cannot be reasonably estimated. The Company has not historically made material payments for these types of indemnifications. The estimated maximum potential amount of future payments under these obligations is not determinable due to the lack of a stated maximum liability for certain matters, and therefore, no related liability has been recorded. Management believes that judgments, if any, against the Company related to such matters are not likely to have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated financial statements.

Most of the jurisdictions in which the Company is admitted to transact business require life insurance companies to participate in guaranty associations, which are organized to pay contractual benefits owed pursuant to insurance policies issued by insolvent life insurance companies. These associations levy assessments, up to prescribed limits, on all member companies in a particular state based on the proportionate share of premiums written by member companies in the lines of business in which the insolvent insurer operated. The Company has not received notification of any insolvency that is expected to result in a material guaranty fund assessment.

The Asset Purchase Agreements of Aviation Trust, ACG Trust II and ACG Trust III (Note 4) provide that Pacific LifeCorp will guarantee the performance of certain obligations of ACG, as well as provide certain indemnifications, and that Pacific Life will assume certain obligations of ACG arising from the breach of certain representations and warranties under the Asset Purchase Agreements. Management believes that obligations, if any, related to these guarantees are not likely to have a material adverse effect on the Company’s consolidated financial statements. The financial debt obligations of Aviation Trust, ACG Trust II and ACG Trust III are non-recourse to the Company and are not guaranteed by the Company.

In connection with the operations of certain subsidiaries, the Company has made commitments to provide for additional capital funding as may be required.

See Note 10 for discussion of contingencies related to derivative instruments.

See Note 18 for discussion of other contingencies related to income taxes.

PL-64


PERFORMANCE
Total Returns
Yields
Performance Comparisons and Benchmarks
Power of Tax Deferral

DISTRIBUTION OF THE CONTRACTS
Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD)

THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT
Calculating Subaccount Unit Values
Corresponding Dates
Age and Sex of Annuitant
Systematic Transfer Program
Pre-Authorized Withdrawals
More on Federal Tax Issues
Safekeeping of Assets

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM AND INDEPENDENT AUDITORS

You can receive a copy of the Schwab Retirement Income Variable Annuity SAI without charge by calling us at (800) 722-4448 or you can visit our website at www.pacificlife.com to download a copy. Schwab Financial Consultants may call us at (800) 610-4823.


	Page No.

PERFORMANCE		1
Total Returns		1
Yields		2
Performance Comparisons and Benchmarks		2
Power of Tax Deferral		4

DISTRIBUTION OF THE CONTRACTS		4
Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD)		4

THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT		5
Calculating Subaccount Unit Values		5
Corresponding Dates		6
Age and Sex of Annuitant		6
Systematic Transfer Program		6
Pre-Authorized Withdrawals		7
More on Federal Tax Issues		7
Safekeeping of Assets		8

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS		8

INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM AND INDEPENDENT AUDITORS		8


	Years Ended December 31,
(Continued)	2011			2010			2009
				(In Millions)
CASH FLOWS FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES
Policyholder account balances:
Deposits	$	4,521		$	4,272		$	8,003
Withdrawals		(6,599	)		(5,162	)		(7,972	)
Net change in short-term debt					(105	)		(45	)
Issuance of long-term debt		1,124			1,815			1,692
Payments of long-term debt		(768	)		(1,012	)		(433	)
Contribution from (dividend to) parent		(125	)		(150	)		200
Other financing activities, net		12			(30	)		1

NET CASH PROVIDED BY (USED IN) FINANCING ACTIVITIES		(1,835	)		(372	)		1,446


Net change in cash and cash equivalents		559			351			(1,478	)
Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of year		2,270			1,919			3,397


CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS, END OF YEAR	$	2,829		$	2,270		$	1,919


SUPPLEMENTAL DISCLOSURES OF CASH FLOW INFORMATION
Income taxes paid (received), net	$	(7	)	$	113		$	(143	)
Interest paid	$	222		$	175		$	146


⁽¹⁾		Included are $7 million of OTTI recognized in earnings on perpetual preferred securities carried in trusts.

⁽²⁾		Included are $29 million of OTTI recognized in earnings on perpetual preferred securities carried in trusts.


	Years Ended
	December 31,
	2011			2010
	(In Millions)
Cumulative credit loss, January 1	$	245		$	200
Additions for credit impairments recognized on:
Securities not previously other than temporarily impaired		15			14
Securities previously other than temporarily impaired		87			46

Total additions		102			60

Reductions for credit impairments previously recognized on:
Securities that matured or were sold		(71	)		(5	)
Securities due to an increase in expected cash flows and time value of cash flows		(8	)		(10	)

Total subtractions		(79	)		(15	)

Cumulative credit loss, December 31	$	268		$	245

		OTHER INVESTED ASSETS

		Included in other invested assets are private equity investments in which the estimated fair value is based on the ownership percentage of the underlying equity of the investments.

		CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS

		The carrying values approximate fair values due to the short-term maturities of these instruments.

		RESTRICTED CASH

		The carrying values approximate fair values due to the short-term maturities of these instruments.

		FUNDING AGREEMENTS AND GICs

		The estimated fair value of funding agreements and GICs is estimated using the rates currently offered for deposits of similar remaining maturities.

		ANNUITY AND DEPOSIT LIABILITIES

		Annuity and deposit liabilities primarily includes policyholder deposits and accumulated credited interest. The estimated fair value of annuity and deposit liabilities approximates carrying value based on an analysis of discounted future cash flows with maturities similar to the product portfolio liabilities.

		LONG-TERM DEBT

		The estimated fair value of long-term debt is based on market quotes, except for VIE debt and non-recourse debt, for which the carrying amounts are reasonable estimates of their fair values because the interest rate approximates current market rates.